Thank you for purchasing this Factory Service

Manual CD/DVD from servicemanuals4u.com.

Please check out our eBay auctions for more great

deals on Factory Service Manuals:

servicemanuals4u
i
 Note

Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices”
on page 299.

First Edition (September 1996)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow
disclaimers or express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements or changes in the products or the programs described in this publication at any time.

Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM Authorized Dealer or your IBM
Marketing Representative.

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1996. All rights reserved. Note to US Government
Users – Documentation related to restricted rights – Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in
GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
 Thank You for Selecting
an IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL Computer

The IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL computer

is one of the most advanced notebook computers available today.
We are happy to offer this computer to help
meet all your multimedia and mobile computing needs.

iii
What would You Like to Do?
What would you like to do? The following gives you a shortcut to where you can find information in this
book. Find the topic that interests you; then follow the arrow!

Setting up the computer for the first time Page 7.

Installing options Chapter 6 .

Installing PC Cards Page 122.

Using PC Card Director Page 44.

Configuring the computer Page 35.

Creating the backup diskettes using the Diskette Factory
Page 12.

Reinstalling the operating system Chapter 7.

Changing the system resource setting Appendix A.

Sending a fax Page 13.

Attaching a printer Page 14.

Communicating with infrared Page 15.

Capturing a motion video Page 16.

iv IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

Frequently asked question Page 229.

Troubleshooting chart Page 235.

IBM help systems Page 259.

Preserving battery power Page 90.

Using passwords Page 101.

v
About This Book
This book contains information that will help you operate the IBM
ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL computer (hereafter called the
760E, 760ED, or 760EL, or computer).

Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” provides information about how to

set up your computer.
Chapter 2, “Getting Familiar with Your Computer,” acquaints you
with the basic features of your computer.
Chapter 3, “Operating Your Computer,” provides information on
using your computer's various features.
Chapter 4, “Using Battery Power,” describes how to operate your
computer with the battery pack, and get longer battery life.
Chapter 5, “Protecting Your Computer,” provides information for
protecting your computer and internal devices.
Chapter 6, “Installing and Removing Options,” describes how to
install or remove IBM options.
Chapter 7, “Installing Software,” provides procedures for installing
operating systems and device drivers in your computer.
Chapter 8, “Solving Computer Problems,” describes what to do
when you have a computer problem.
Appendix A, “System Resources,” lists the system resources and
provides some steps you can take to avoid problems when you add
or remove options.
Appendix B, “Advanced Information for PC Cards,” provides
additional information when using PC Cards.
Appendix C, “Features and Specifications,” describes the
features and specifications associated with your computer.
Appendix D, “Product Warranties and Notices,” contains the
warranty statements for your computer and notices for this book.

vi IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

Viewing the Online Book
Note: You can view this User's Guide online to retrieve information about
The online book is not available in all the computer.
countries.
To start the online book preloaded in the hard disk of your computer,
click on the Online Book icon in your operating system.

Information Notices
This book contains notices that relate to specific information or text.

Note Caution
Provides important hints, tips,
Usild Lke Sejk

Indicates situations that are

Using Easy-Setup
guidance, or advice. Ltke fsoie ltij erlkjs efoitj sdf. The skfeoig
potentially hazardous to you.
lksjdf otie sfldkj tekjs fdi zdif lkt elskfd.
Note:
LKjef osijdf lke.
LIej tlkje sfoi efp sl
lkjdf toie sfekjt.
Pdfk setk sdfk shtke fdij thesdfkl sekj soit
oit skdf 3 lskdti shd gkejt wse. Tkj eoisdjf
tlkjsd.
It appears in text before the
Attention
Caution:
Ljsdkf thkejr fosidj tlkje afshei ldfkue.
Toisdjf sldj ohd flskajt shdf, foiasj.
instruction or situation that
LKj tlke fsoiej glkje f
lskjdf oiret e. SKjt
slkfj eoit sf.
Danger:
could be hazardous.
Lskjdt oidsfa thie rsldkj etskdjf xo.
Oijds kj dtah fia glisdjf klasdjt sadf.

Attention 1 LKdkfsa oif lkaj oisdt lskef.

Indicates possible damage to Danger

programs, devices, system, or Indicates situations that are
data. It appears next to the Chapter 2. Yoekf Blksd Lekjf 109 potentially lethal or extremely
related instruction or situation hazardous to you. It is indicated
in which possible damage could
occur. by the symbol and appears
in text before the instruction or
situation that could be dangerous.

vii
Computer Models and Treatment of Icons
We offer several models of the ThinkPad 760 computer. Each model
has different features. In this book, information unique to each
feature is described with the following icons:

Mwave DSP feature ( 760Mwave ) : Built-in 28.8Kbps modem, telephony, and

Sound Blaster** Pro functions
760
ESS AudioDrive feature ( ESS ) : Support for Sound Blaster Pro audio

Enhanced video with MPEG feature ( 760

EnhVideo ) : Support for Windows
Direct Draw and MPEG-II player, TV in/out, and a game port
Standard video: our simplest video solution
760
Built-in CD-ROM drive in the UltraBay ( CD )
760
Built-in diskette drive in the UltraBay ( FDD )
TFT LCD display
DSTN LCD display

In addition to the icons just described, this book contains the

following icons for procedures or information unique to the operating
system installed in your computer:

Information for IBM Information for IBM DOS

O S / 2
Operating System/2 DOS users.
(OS/2) users.

Information for Microsoft Information for Microsoft

WIN WIN
Windows Version 3.11 Windows 95 users.
users.

Information for Microsoft

WIN
Windows NT Workstation
Version 3.51 users.

viii IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

Ergonomics Information
This is important information to read before using your ThinkPad
computer.

Working while “on the go” may mean adapting to frequent changes in
your environment. Following some simple “rules of the road” will
make things easier and bring you the maximum benefits of your
ThinkPad computer. Keeping in mind such basics as good lighting
and proper seating, for example, can go a long way in helping you
enhance your performance and achieve greater comfort wherever
you are.

What if I am traveling?
It may not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when
you are using the ThinkPad computer while on the move or in a
“casual” setting, such as the seashore or on a mountaintop.
Sometimes, your lap may be the only “desk” around. Regardless of
the setting, try to observe as many of the tips for proper usage as
possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example,
will help you maintain desirable comfort and performance levels.

Questions about vision?

IBM's visual display screens are designed to meet the highest
standards and to provide you with clear, crisp images and large,
bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Of
course, any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring.
If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a
vision care specialist for advice.

ix
Note:
The example shown here of 1 Head
someone in a traditional setting.
Even when not in such a setting, you
can follow many of these tips. 2 View
Develop good habits and they will 4 Chair
serve you well.
3 Display
5 Arms

6 Thighs

1 Head 4 Chair
Keep your head in a comfortable Use a chair that gives you good
and vertical position. back support.

2 View 5 Arms
Maintain a comfortable viewing Keep your forearms, wrists, and
distance of 20–30 inches. hands in a relaxed and neutral
position. Don't pound the keys;
3 Display type with a soft touch.
Position the display to avoid
glare or reflections from 6 Thighs
overhead lighting or outside Keep your thighs parallel to the
sources of light. floor and your feet flat on the
floor or on a footrest.
Keep the display screen clean
and set the contrast and
brightness to levels that allow
you to see the screen clearly.

x IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

Safety Notice
DANGER

Do not disassemble, incinerate, or short-circuit the

rechargeable battery pack (in the battery pack bay). Do
not put it in trash that is disposed of in landfills.
Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or
regulations. In the United States, call IBM at
1-800-IBM-4333 for information on disposal.

CAUTION:
The lithium battery (IBM P/N 29H8924, UL-recognized
component—File No. MH12210) on the system board of the
computer can be replaced only by your dealer or an IBM
service representative. It contains lithium and can explode
if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Do not: (1)
throw or immerse into water, (2) heat to more than 100°C
(212°F), or (3) repair or disassemble. Dispose of it as
required by local ordinances or regulations.
The nickel metal hydride rechargeable battery on the system
board of the computer, can be replaced only by your dealer
or an IBM service representative. Do not disassemble,
incinerate, or short-circuit it. The battery can cause burns
or release toxic chemicals. Do not put it in trash that is
disposed of in landfills. Dispose of it as required by local
ordinances and regulations.
The fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD)
contains mercury. Do not put it in trash that is disposed of
in landfills. Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or
regulations.
The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping
the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD
breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your
hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at
least 15 minutes; then get medical care if any symptoms are
present after washing.

xi
 Laser Compliance Statement
760 The CD-ROM drive in the IBM ThinkPad 760ED is a laser product.
CD
The CD-ROM drive's classification label (shown below) is located on
the top of the drive.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

The CD-ROM drive is certified in the U.S. to conform to the

requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21
Code of Federal Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class
I laser products.

In other countries, the drive is certified to conform to the

requirements of EN60825.

CAUTION:
Do not open the CD-ROM drive; no user adjustments or
serviceable parts are inside.

Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures

other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.

Class I (1) laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The

CD-ROM drive has an internal, Class I (1), 0.5-milliwatt, aluminum
gallium-arsenide laser that operates at a wavelength of 760 to 810
nanometers. The design of the laser system and the CD-ROM drive
ensures that there is no exposure to laser radiation above a Class I
(1) level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing
conditions.

xii IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Contents

About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Viewing the Online Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Information Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Computer Models and Treatment of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Ergonomics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Laser Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Chapter 1. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Overall Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Checking Your Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Walking through the ThinkPad Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sending a Fax Message (Mwave Model Only) . . . . . . . . 13
Attaching a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Infrared Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Capturing a Motion Video (Enhanced Video Model Only) . . 16

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer . . . . . . 19

Identifying the Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
System-Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the Fn Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating with the TrackPoint III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operating the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using CD-ROMs and Music CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Using the ThinkPad Features Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using Easy-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . 38
Using the LCD and an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Changing the Resolution or Color Depth for the LCD . . . . 41
Attaching an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using the PC Card Director Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Restrictions on the PC Cards Supported by the Computer . 46
PC Card Limitations under Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the PC Card in Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 xiii

 Using the Option Diskette for the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . 47
Removing the Storage PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using the Infrared Communication Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the Mwave DSP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using the Audio Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Telephony Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the ESS AudioDrive Sound feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the MIDI/Joystick Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Attaching a Television to the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Features . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Functions for
OS/2 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Functions for
Windows 3.11 and Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Charging the Battery Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Replacing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Monitoring the Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using the Battery Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using the Fuel-Gauge Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Preserving Battery-Pack Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the Battery Power-Management Function . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using the Personalization Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the Security Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the PC Card Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options . . . . . . . . . 121

Installing and Removing PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Installing a Memory Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Replacing the Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Installing the CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

xiv IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

Installing the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay . . . . . . . 138
Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay . . . . . 142
Installing an Option in the UltraBay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse . . . . . . . 152
Using the Serial Mouse and Other Pointing Devices . . . . . 153
Attaching an External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Using the Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Using the SelectaDock Docking System . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Using the Dock I or Dock II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Using the SCSI Device with the Dock I . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Using the Security Plate for the Docking Station . . . . . . . 161

Chapter 7. Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Installing the Operating System and Device Drivers . . . . . . . 166
Installing Software for OS/2 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Before Installing OS/2 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing IBM OS/2 Warp Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . 176
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2 . . . . . 177
Installing the PC Card Director for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2 . . . . 179
Installing the ESS AudioDrive Support Software for OS/2 . . 180
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2 . . . 182
Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver for OS/2 183
Installing Software for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Installing IBM PC DOS Version 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for DOS . . . . . . . . 186
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for DOS . . . . . 187
Installing the PC Card Director for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Installing Software for Windows Version 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows 3.11 . . 193
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows 3.11 194
Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 3.11 . . . . . . 194
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows
3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing the MIDI Port Device Driver for Windows 3.11 . . . 196

Contents xv
 Installing the ESS AudioDrive Support Software for Windows
3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows 3.11 . . . . 197
Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and the
Video CD Player for Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing Software for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Installing Microsoft Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows 95 . . . 201
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows 95 . 203
Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . 204
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows 95 207
Installing the AudioDrive Support Software for Windows 95 . 208
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows 95 . . . . . 209
Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for Windows 95 . . . . 210
Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and the
Video CD Player for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disabling the Docking Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Using Windows 95 with the Dock II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Installing Software for Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51 . 216
Installing Microsoft Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Installing the Video Features Diskette for Windows NT . . . 218
Using the Video Features Diskette for the External Monitor . 219
Installing the PCMCIA Token Ring Device Driver for
Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows NT . 221
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows NT 222
Installing the AudioDrive Support Software for Windows NT 223
Installing the ThinkPad PCI-IDE Driver for Windows NT . . . 225

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Common Problems and Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . 229
Common Problems and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Frequently Asked Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Testing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Error Codes and Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
LCD Blank or Power-On Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Other General Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Battery Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

xvi IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 CD-ROM Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Diskette Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Enhanced Video/MPEG Feature Problems . . . . . . . . . . 246
Docking Station Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
External Monitor Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Television Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Suspend and Hibernation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Infrared Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Keyboard, External Numeric Keypad, and Pointing Device
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Mwave DSP Feature Problems (Audio and Telephony) . . . 252
Option Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Getting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Listing Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Recording Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Using the HelpWare Support Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Purchasing Additional HelpWare Services . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Custom Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Obtaining IBM Operating System Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 265
About Your Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Appendix A. System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Avoiding System Resource Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Avoiding System Resource Conflicts When Using PC Cards 269
List of System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards . . . . . . 275

Auto Configurator for PC Card Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows . 275
Adding to the CONFIG.SYS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for OS/2 . . . . . . . 279
Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for DOS and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Storage Card Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . 283
PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for DOS and Windows 283
Before Using PCMCIA Storage Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Contents xvii
 Using PCMCIA ATA Cards with Multiple Partitions . . . . . . 284
Parameters for the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA Card Device Driver . 284
Parameters for DOS PCMCIA Storage Card Device Drivers 285
PCMCIA Storage Card Device Manager for OS/2 . . . . . . 286
OS/2 PCMCIA Storage API Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Flash Card Memory Technology Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Checking the Allocated Resources for the PC Card . . . . . . . 288
Avoiding PC Card Resource Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Virtual Card Services for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Appendix C. Features and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 291

IBM Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Appendix D. Product Warranties and Notices . . . . . . . . 297

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Electronic Emission Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Telecommunication Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

xviii IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 1. Getting Started

Welcome to the world of ThinkPad computers!

The ThinkPad computer is designed to meet your multimedia and

mobile computing needs. You can use your computer in the office or
at home as a desktop computer by attaching an external keyboard,
display, or other external devices. And, of course, your computer
can be easily carried wherever you need a computer “on the go.”

This chapter describes step-by-step instructions to help you set up

your new computer.

Overall Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Checking Your Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Walking through the ThinkPad Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sending a Fax Message (Mwave Model Only) . . . . . . . . 13
Attaching a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Infrared Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Capturing a Motion Video (Enhanced Video Model Only) . . 16

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 1

Getting Started

Overall Setup Procedures

When using the computer for the first time:

Set Up the Computer

1 2
First, check whether you have all the necessary items with
your computer.
See page 4.
Then, install the battery pack in the computer. Now you
1
are ready to turn on the computer.
2

See page 7.

Install Options

2 If you have any options, such as memory cards, install the

options.
See page 121.

3
Customize Your Computer

Easy-Setup You can use Easy-Setup, a built-in system function, to set

passwords to prevent your computer from unauthorized
1 2 3 use, or use the ThinkPad Features program to customize
Config Date/Time Password Start Up Test
the performance of your computer.
Restart For Easy-Setup, see page 37.
For the ThinkPad Features program, see page 35.

ThinkPad Features

2 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Started

4
Make a Backup of Your System
Your computer comes with the necessary software already
installed for you to use the computer right out of the box.
However, on some computers, the Diskette Factory
program is installed so you can create backup diskettes.
On other computers, you will find utility and device driver
diskettes packed in the box with the computer.
If your computer did not come with the utility and device
driver diskettes, make a backup copy of all necessary files
using the Diskette Factory program. This way, if you ever
need to reinstall the operating system, you will have all the
necessary software you need to restore your computer to
the way it was at the time of purchase.

Do you need more hard disk space?

If your computer did not come with the utility and device driver diskettes, and you have already made a backup
copy of all necessary software using the Diskette Factory program, you can delete any preloaded software you
do not want to use to have more free hard disk space.
Click on the Diskette Factory icon; then follow the instructions on the screen.

You are ready to use your computer. If you are reinstalling the operating system...
If you have any application programs to install, follow If you are reinstalling the operating system to
the instructions in the documentation that came with customize your computer, follow the instructions in
those programs. Chapter 7.

If you have any problems after you have customized your computer, refer to “Common Problems
and Frequently Asked Questions” on page 229 to solve your problem.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 3

Getting Started

Checking Your Items

Remove the items from the shipping box and check that all
necessary items are shipped with your computer.

1 Match the items, one by one, with the following figure.

If any item is missing or damaged, contact your place of
purchase.

Computer Battery Pack

Power Cord AC Adapter

760 760
CD CD
Internal Diskette Drive ThinkPad Media Library

The internal diskette drive is

installed in the UltraBay when the
CD-ROM drive is removed. This is a sample CD-ROM that
includes audio and video clips
(available in some countries).

4 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Started

Miscellaneous Items Utility Diskettes

Envelope
This envelope contains: Driver Diskettes

Telephone cable (available in These diskettes contain various

some countries) system programs and device
Spare caps for TrackPoint III drivers.
Spacer Note: In some countries, you
PC (PCMCIA**) Card lock should create backup diskettes
760 MIDI/joystick cable using the Diskette Factory program
EnhVideo
760 when the computer power is turned
EnhVideo Video in/out cable
Other items on for the first time. (See page 12.)

2 Turn the computer upside down and record the identification

numbers 1 on page 258 of this manual.
The machine type has a prefix of Type.
The serial number has a prefix of S/N.

After recording the numbers, place the computer as it was (so

that the side marked IBM ThinkPad faces up).

Chapter 1. Getting Started 5

Getting Started

1 2
Right-Side View

2
1

3 Right-Side View

3
1

6 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Started

Setting Up Your Computer

You are now ready to configure and start your computer. First, install the battery pack.

1 Slide and hold the latches on both sides of the computer toward you, and push up the liquid
crystal display (LCD). Open the LCD all the way.

When the LCD opens, the keyboard is slanted slightly at an easy typing angle.

2 Slide the keyboard raisers 1 on both sides of the keyboard toward you, so the keyboard lies flat
on the computer.

Make sure the security latch 2 is at the right position (unlocked). If it is at the left position ( ),
push and slide it to the right.

Note:
Always push the keyboard down flat on the computer whenever you open the keyboard.

3 Hook your thumbs on the tabs 3 on the front of the keyboard, and your index fingers on the
same latches used in step 1. Push and hold the latches away from you; then raise the keyboard.
Some pressure might be needed to unlock these latches if they are tight.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 7

Getting Started

4 760
CD

1
11

2
2

760

5
CD

760
FDD

760

6
CD
2
2

11

2 3
2

2
2

11

8 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Started

4 760
CD Lift the CD-ROM handle with the plastic tape 1 and remove the CD-ROM drive from the
computer.
Some pressure might be needed to remove the CD-ROM drive if it is tight.

5 760
CD
760
FDD

DANGER

The battery pack provided with your computer contains a small amount of harmful
substances. To avoid possible injury:
Keep the battery pack away from fire.
Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain.
Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack.
Avoid mechanical shocks to the battery.
Always use battery packs recommended by IBM.
Keep the battery pack away from children.
When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations or your
company's safety standards.

Install the battery pack with the blue-strap side up into the middle (empty) bay, and press it firmly
into the connector.

6 760
CD Install the CD-ROM drive into its bay and press on the upper part of it (shaded area 2 )
firmly into the connector; then close the keyboard.
Attention:
When installing the CD-ROM drive, press only on the upper part of the CD-ROM drive. Do not
press on the middle part of the drive.

Make sure the CD-ROM handle snaps into place when doing step 3 and the keyboard clicks
into place when you close it.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 9

Getting Started

7
OR

A B

10
1
9
3

10 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Started

7
A You can raise the keyboard to an angle for easy typing by sliding the keyboard raiser A (used
in step 2 on page 7) away from you.
or:
B When you want to type on a flat keyboard, lock the flat keyboard position by sliding the
keyboard latches B away from you.
Attention:
Remember to push the keyboard latches toward the front of the computer whenever you close
the LCD.

8 Adjust the LCD angle so that it is convenient for viewing; then slide the speaker volume control to
the middle position and position the brightness control ( ) and the contrast control ( ) as
shown. (Only the DSTN model has a contrast control.)

9 Connect the AC Adapter as shown.

DANGER

Do not attempt to open the AC Adapter case. The AC Adapter is permanently

sealed and cannot be repaired.

Attention:
Always use an AC Adapter certified by IBM in the country where you will be using the computer.
Operating the computer with an incorrect AC Adapter can cause damage to the battery pack and
to the computer.

10 Push and release the power switch to turn on the computer.

The power switch automatically snaps back to its original position.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 11

Getting Started

11 After a single beep, one of the following screens appears, confirming that the system is operating
correctly:

1996 .12.31
Year Month Day

23:59:59
Hour Month Second

Date and Time menu Startup screen

This screen instructs you to set the initial date and If you purchased a computer with a preloaded
time. To set the date and time, see “Using operating system, the startup screen for the operating
Easy-Setup” on page 37. system appears. (The screen shown is an example of
OS/2 Warp.)

If any other screen appears, a failure might have occurred in the computer. See Chapter 8.

Congratulations! You have successfully completed the basic setup of your computer.

Important

It is recommended that you make a backup copy of the files on

the hard disk drive, in case you accidentally erase preloaded
software or intentionally modify the hard disk drive. You can use
the backup copy to restore your computer to the way it was at
the time of purchase.
In some countries, you can create the diskettes you need to
install all necessary software, using the Diskette Factory
program preloaded in your computer.

To use the Diskette Factory:

1. Click on the Diskette Factory ( ) icon in your operating system. (The list of diskette names
is shown with the number of necessary new 1.44MB diskettes.)
2. Click on the diskette names you want to create; then click on Build.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.

You can now start using your computer by proceeding to the next section, Walking through the
ThinkPad Basics, or you can read Chapter 2 for more information about your computer.

12 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Walking through ThinkPad Basics

Walking through the ThinkPad Basics

The ThinkPad computer preloads a lot of useful software. This
section introduces how to use your computer by using these pieces
of software in the Windows 95 environment.

Sending a Fax Message (Mwave Model Only)

You can send or receive a fax message with the ThinkPad's Mwave
WIN 760
Mwave
feature and a preloaded application FaxWorks**. With FaxWorks,
the ThinkPad computer works as a fax machine, telephone, or
answering machine.
This section describes how to send a fax from the Windows 95
application WordPad.
To attach the telephone line: 1 Attach an active telephone line to the modem/fax port on the
Page 151. left side of the computer.
2 Start Windows 95, and double-click on Preloaded
Applications, FaxWorks and then Call Center.
FaxWorks
File Edit View Help

Call Center FaxWorks Help Quick Setup Read Me Register

If you are using FaxWorks for the first time, you are prompted to do
the basic setup. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the screen
until the following window appears in the Windows 95 screen:
Call Center - Mailbox 1

Close Call Center

0 New Msgs. 0 Old Msgs.
Speakerphone...
Messages

Quick Fax...
Memo Play New Play Old Stop Rewind Skip Delete

Voice & Fax Log

Play Time: 0:00 Elapsed Time: 0:00 Volume

Setup...

Waiting for Call 09/30/96 2:43 pm

More...

Chapter 1. Getting Started 13

Walking through ThinkPad Basics

3 Select Start at the bottom of the Windows 95 screen. Select

Programs, Accessories, and then WordPad.
4 In the WordPad white screen, type the text you wish to fax.
5 Select File on the menu bar, and select Print from the
pull-down menu. Then select FX-WORKS from the pull-down
menu for Name.
6 Select OK.
The FaxWorks - Send Fax screen is automatically displayed.
7 Type a fax number you want to send the fax to. (Your own fax
number is recommended for a test.)
8 Select Send to send the fax.
Check if your fax has been sent to the destination number.

For more information about FaxWorks, see the document for

FaxWorks that came with the computer.

Attaching a Printer
The following describes how to attach a printer to the computer and
WIN
set up for Windows 95:

1 Attach your printer to the parallel connector ( ) at the rear of

the computer.
2 Select Start in Windows 95, select Settings, and then select
Printers.
3 Double-click on Add Printer. Follow the instructions on the
screen.

The new icon for your printer appears in the Printers folder. Now,
you can use your printer from Windows 95.
For more details, refer to the “Printing” section in the Windows 95
manual (Introducing Microsoft Windows 95), which is contained in
the Windows 95 package.

14 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Walking through ThinkPad Basics

Using the Infrared Communication

Your ThinkPad computer is equipped with two infrared ports on the
WIN
front and rear of the computer. Through each port you can share or
transfer computer data without any cables between your computer
and another computer equipped with an infrared port.

This section describes how to communicate between two ThinkPad

computers using a preloaded application TranXit.
1 Start Windows 95, and double-click on Preloaded
Applications, and then TranXit.
You will see a file manager window.
2 If this is the first time you use TranXit, select Setup, and then
Computer Name.
Type your favorite name for each computer. (The names must
not be the same.)
3 Place the two computers so that the infrared ports face each
other:
Note:
It is recommended that you use the
rear infrared port for communicating
between ThinkPad computers. [Side view]

Note
To prevent the light from the LCD from affecting the infrared
communication, open the LCD to a wide angle.

[Side view]

Chapter 1. Getting Started 15

Walking through ThinkPad Basics

After a short pause, the file manager window splits in two:

TranXit 2.0
File Disk Tree View Options Tab Setup Window Help Upgrade

File Transfer Print Redirector

[ThinkPad 760CD] - C:\ThinkPad\*.* [IBM ThinkPad] - C:\*.*

BACKUP IBM cdrom

BONUSPAK CONFIG.SYS cdrom cserve
BOOK AUTOEXEC.BAT cserve csw
CDMANUAL cdrom csw diskettes
CDROM mwave diskettes dvp
COSESS dvp dvp mwave
DISK10 emerge1 factory
DISK11 factory factory2
DISK12 faxworks factory3
DISK13 ipf factory4
DISK14 ipf factory5

Total 12 files (32,412 bytes) Total 33 files (55,789 bytes)

The window on the left displays the contents of the hard disk in the
other (“remote”) computer.
4 You can copy a file or directory between computers by
dragging and dropping. See online help for more details.

Capturing a Motion Video (Enhanced Video Model Only)

760 You can easily capture video using the preloaded application Digital
EnhVideo WIN
Video Producer and your video equipment. You can use the
captured image to create a bitmap file, or to “cut and paste” into
your presentation file.
This section describes how to capture motion video using the video
camera, and save it to the computer's hard disk.
1 Turn off the computer.
2 Have your video camera and your video connector cable
(yellow) 1 ready. Also, have the following video in-out cable
2 (shipped with the computer at the time of purchase) ready.

16 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Walking through ThinkPad Basics

Note: 3 Attach your video camera to the video-in connector 3 ( ) of

Make sure the arrow mark ( ) the computer as follows:
faces the top when you attach
the video in-out cable to the
video-in port of the computer. 3
To connect the video camera
and the video cable, see the
video camera manual.

Video camera

4 Turn on the power of the video camera.

5 Start Windows 95 and double-click on Preloaded
Applications, Digital Video Producer, and then Digital Video
Producer Capture.
Note: Asymetrix Digital Video Producer Capture Tool
The current video view is shown in File Edit Options Capture Help
the live window.

Live Window...

Chapter 1. Getting Started 17

Walking through ThinkPad Basics

6 Select File on the menu bar and select Set Capture File.
In this window, define the name of the file your captured image
is saved to. (You can use the default name capture.avi.)
Select OK to return to the main window.
Note: 7 Select Capture on the menu bar and Setting; then add a
If you do not select a capture time check mark for Enable Capture Time Limit and type a capture
limit, the computer continues
time limit (for example, 10 seconds).
capturing video images until the hard
Select OK.
disk is full.
This setting specifies that Digital Video Producer will capture
motion video for 10 seconds into the file capture.avi (or
whatever file name you specified).
8 Select Capture on the menu bar and then Video.
The moment you select Video, the computer begins capturing
motion video for 10 seconds.
9 Close Digital Video Producer and review the captured image
using Windows Media Player.
Select Start, Accessories, Multimedia, and then Media
Player.
10 Select Device on the menu bar and select Video for
Windows.
11 Select capture.avi (or your defined file's name) under the
C:\DVP directory; then select Open.

12 Select Play ( ) to view your captured image.

You can save audio information concurrently using Digital Video

Producer. For more information about Digital Video Producer and
the video capture function, see “Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG
Features” on page 65.

18 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer

This chapter provides basic information about your computer.

Identifying the Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

System-Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the Fn Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating with the TrackPoint III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operating the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using CD-ROMs and Music CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 19

Identifying the Hardware Features

Identifying the Hardware Features

In this section, you can review the hardware features of your
computer.
Top View

Front View
18 2
3
17

4
6
5

16
6

12 7

14 8

9
With the CD-ROM drive With the diskette drive
10

15 11
14 12
13
21 22
20 19 19

20 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Identifying the Hardware Features

Top View

1 The indicator lamps consist of the

power-on, suspend, and battery-status
lamps. (See page 24.)

Front View

2 Color LCD screen 9 PC Card slots 17 LCD indicator panel

(For using, see page 40.) (To use the PC Card software, (For details, see page 40.)
see page 44. To insert a PC 18 Volume control
3 Built-in microphone Card, see page 122.)
19 / The removable
4 The contrast control 1 PC Card eject buttons
diskette drive or removable
moves up or down to adjust (For using, see page 124.)
CD-ROM drive can be
the clarity of the picture. (For
11 The Security keyhole is installed in the UltraBay.
the DSTN LCD model only.)
used with the Kensington (To install, see Chapter 6. To
5 The brightness control MicroSaver** Security System use a CD-ROM, see page 30.)
moves up or down to adjust lock. (For using, see page 760
the brightness of the display. 117.) 2 CD The CD-ROM
emergency eject hole ejects
6 The keyboard raisers release 12 The release latches release the CD-ROM tray when it does
the keyboard flat before the LCD or keyboard. Sliding not open with the CD-ROM
opening it. them toward the front opens eject button. Insert a pin to
(For using, see page 11.) the LCD, and sliding them eject the CD-ROM tray.
7 Keyboard towards the back opens the
760
(For using the numeric keyboard. 21 CD The CD-ROM eject
keypad, see page 29.) button ejects the CD-ROM
13 Front infrared port tray from the CD-ROM drive.
8 The external-input-device (For using, see page 50.) Using this button, you can play
connector is used to attach a 14 Built-in speakers a music CD.
mouse, external keyboard, or (For details, see page 30.)
external numeric keypad to the 15 TrackPoint III
(For using, see page 28.) 760
computer. 22 FDD Diskette-eject button
(See pages 152–154.) 16 Fn key
(For details, see page 26.)

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 21

Identifying the Hardware Features

Rear View

17
16

15
14
13

2
12

3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11

Inside View Bottom View

23
18
24
19

25

20

21 22

22 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Identifying the Hardware Features

Rear View

1 Rear door 7 The power shutdown switch is 13 Headphone jack

used to turn the computer off (For details, see page 51.)
2 The connector door allows you to
when an application locks up or
connect a cable to the
the computer will not accept any 14 Microphone/line-in jack
system-expansion connector when
input. Use the tip of a pen to (For details, see page 51.)
the rear door is closed.
press this switch.
3 MIDI/ 760
8 External-monitor 15 Modem/fax port
EnhVideo
MIDI/joystick port connector (This is offered as an option in
(For using, see page 60.) (For using, see page 42.) some countries. For using, see
page 56. For installing, see page
4 External-diskette-drive 149.)
9 The parallel connector is
connector (The external diskette
where you usually connect a
drive is available as an option.) 16 / 760
parallel-printer signal cable. EnhVideo
Video in/out ports (For use, see
5 Rear infrared port 1 The serial connector is page 65.)
where you connect a 9-pin,
6 The system-expansion serial-device cable. 17 Power switch
connector is used to connect the
IBM docking station or port 11 G
S
-
+ The Power jack is
replicator. (For using the docking where the AC Adapter cable is
station, see page 155.) connected.
12 Option cover
(For details, see page 146.)

Inside View

18 Modem/fax port release latch (For 2 Battery pack

22 Removable hard disk drive
using, see page 149.) (For replacing, see page 85.)
(For replacing, see page 132.)
19 The UltraBay accepts 21 The security latch opens or
various devices, such as a closes the security keyhole.
CD-ROM drive, diskette drive, (See page 117.)
secondary battery pack, or others.
(See page 146.)

Bottom View

23 Memory slot 24 Memory-slot cover 25 Serial number (S/N)

(See page 125.) (See page 125.) Write this down on page 258.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 23

System-Status Indicators

System-Status Indicators
The system-status indicators consist of information shown on a
black-and-white LCD indicator panel ( 1 — 8 ) and indicator lamps
( 9 — 12 ).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11

12

The following table shows the meaning of each indicator:

Item Meaning
1 Speaker Appears when the speaker beeps. It turns off when any key is pressed.

2 Remaining battery Indicates the amount of remaining battery power by a percentage (%), day (d), hour (h),
or hours and minutes (hh:mm).

3 Main battery status Indicates the status of the battery packs installed in the battery pack bay and UltraBay:

The amount of remaining power (in five levels: (Empty)– (Full))

Secondary battery status Charging status ( : charging, : discharging) Blank means no activity.
For details, see page 87.

4 Diskette drive in use Appears when data is read from or written to a diskette. Do not enter suspend mode or
eject the diskette when this indicator is on.

24 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 System-Status Indicators

Item Meaning
5 Hard disk in use Appears when data is read from or written to the hard disk. Do not enter suspend mode
or turn off the computer when this indicator is on.

6 Numeric lock Indicates that the numeric keypad on the keyboard is enabled. Enable or disable the
keypad by pressing and holding the Shift key, and pressing the NumLk key. For
details, see “Operating the Numeric Keypad” on page 29.

7 Caps lock Indicates that the Caps Lock mode is enabled: All alphabetic characters (A–Z) are
entered in capital letters without the use of the Shift key. The Caps Lock mode is
enabled and disabled by pressing the Caps Lock key.

8 Scroll lock Alternately turns on and off each time the ScrLk key is pressed.
While this indicator is on, the Arrow keys are used as screen-scroll function keys. In
this state, the cursor cannot be moved with the Arrow keys. Not all application
programs support this function.
9 Battery Green Enough battery power remains for operation.
Orange The battery pack is being charged.
Blinking orange The battery pack needs charging.
When you set the alarm with the ThinkPad Features program, you
hear three beeps the moment the lamp starts blinking orange.
1 Suspend mode Green Indicates that the computer is in suspend mode. See page 92 for
details about suspend mode.
Blinking green Indicates that the computer is entering suspend mode or
hibernation mode, or is resuming normal operation.
11 Power on Green Indicates that the computer is operational. This indicator is on
when the computer is on and not in suspend mode.

760 Green Turns on when data is read from a media in the CD-ROM drive.
12 CD Do not enter suspend mode or eject the CD-ROM when this lamp is
CD-ROM drive in use on.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 25

Using the Fn Key Function

Using the Fn Key Function

The Fn key function allows you to change operational features
instantly. When you use the following functions, press and hold the
Fn key 1 ; then press the appropriate function key 2 (F1 to F12;
and PgUp or PgDn).
2

Key Function Meaning

Combination
Reserved —
Fn F1
+
Fuel-Gauge The Fuel-Gauge program must be activated before you can use this
Fn F2
+ display on or off key combination. (See page 89.)
When this key combination is pressed:
For OS/2 or Windows users: The window for the battery power
status appears or disappears. Parameters for power status can
be set.
Standby mode Places the computer in standby mode. For more information about
Fn
+ F3 this mode, see page 94.

Suspend mode Places the computer in suspend mode. For more information about
Fn F4
+ this mode, see page 94.

Reserved —
Fn F5
+
Fn F6
+
LCD/external Displays the computer output in the following order when an
Fn F7
+ monitor switching external monitor is attached.
External Both
Monitor

LCD

26 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Fn Key Function

Key Function Meaning

Combination
Reserved —
Fn F8
+
Fn F9
+
Fn F10
+

F11 Power mode When this key combination is pressed during battery-power
Fn
+ switching operation, the power-management (power-saving) mode changes as
follows.
High Auto

Customize
AC mode is used when the AC Adapter is attached. The
Fuel-Gauge program displays the current power option. See page
89.

F12 Hibernation mode Places the computer in hibernation mode. For more information
Fn
+ about this mode, see “Hibernation Mode” on page 98.

Page Dock I speaker Increases the speaker volume for the Dock I attached to the
Fn Up volume up computer.
+

Page
Dock I speaker Decreases the speaker volume for the Dock I attached to the
Fn Down volume down computer.
+

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 27

Using the TrackPoint III

Operating with the TrackPoint III

The keyboard contains a unique cursor-pointing device called the
TrackPoint III. You can perform all the mouse operations with the
TrackPoint III.
Note: To move the mouse cursor on the screen, press gently on the stick
Remember that the stick does not with either index finger in the direction in which you want the pointer
move, and your finger should not to move. To select and drag an object, press the click buttons with
move on it.
either thumb as required by your software, as with any other pointing
devices.

Mouse pointer

Stick

Left click button

Right click button

Note: Hints
The cap 1 on the end of the
TrackPoint III is removable. You can If you press the click button and slide it toward the front of the
replace it with one of the spares computer, the click button locks in place. You can now drag the
shipped with your computer. object across the screen with the TrackPoint III stick without
holding down the click button.

To release the latch, push the click button backward. When you
are not using the TrackPoint III, for example, when the power is
off, do not leave the click button locked.

28 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Operating the Numeric Keypad

Operating the Numeric Keypad

The keyboard has some keys that, when enabled, work as if they
were a 10-key numeric keypad.
Note: To enable the numeric keypad, press and hold Shift and then press
The numeric keypad on the keyboard
is not active when the external NumLk. The NumLK icon ( ) appears on the LCD indicator.
keyboard or the external numeric NumLk

keypad is attached to the computer.

F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

6 7 8 9 / _

Y 4 5 6 * {

H 1 2 3 - "

N 0 < . + Shift

Alt Ctrl

Note: When the numeric keypad is enabled, press and hold Shift to
The keys are functional, but the temporarily use the cursor- and screen-control keys.
function of the key is not printed on
NumLk

the keytop.
F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

6 Home PgUp / _

Y * {

H End PgDn - "

N Ins < Del + Shift

Alt Ctrl

To disable the numeric keypad, press and hold Shift; then press
NumLk again.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 29

Using CD-ROMs and Music CDs

Using CD-ROMs and Music CDs

Attention: 760
Do not touch the lens on the CD You can use a 5-inch CD-ROM with the removable CD-ROM
CD-ROM tray. drive of the computer.

Attention: To use the CD-ROM, push the CD-ROM eject button 1 on the
Hold the CD-ROM by the edges. front of the computer; then pull out the CD-ROM tray.
Do not touch the surface of the Carefully place your CD-ROM onto the CD-ROM tray; then push the
CD-ROM.
tray into the computer until it fully closes.
Note:
If you cannot eject the CD-ROM tray
with the CD-ROM eject button, use
the emergency eject hole. (See
page 21.)

Playing Media
To play media on the CD-ROM drive, do one of the following:
Note: Playing a music CD with the CD-ROM Drive Eject Button
Before playing the CD-ROM drive
with the eject button, you must You can play and stop the music CD with the CD-ROM drive eject
enable the sound features in your button as follows:
operating system. Refer to the
documentation that came with your When Using a CD-ROM or a Music CD
operating system.
760 760
CD When you use a CD-ROM or a music CD with your
Mwave
computer, make sure that Line/CD is selected as the Auxiliary
Control in the Mwave for OS/2 folder. (See page 53.)

30 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using CD-ROMs and Music CDs

Push and hold Push and hold

for more than for more than Skips
Stops 2 seconds 2 seconds
Ejects Plays to the
playing
the CD a CD next
the CD
Push once Push once track
(hold for less (hold for less
than 2 seconds) than 2 seconds)

Playing a CD from an Application

When using OS/2:
O S/2

1 Open the Mwave for OS/2 folder.

2 Double-click on Auxiliary Control and make sure that Line/CD
is selected as the auxiliary source.
3 Open the Multimedia folder; then select Compact Disc.
When using Windows:
WIN WIN
1 Select Mwave ThinkPad and open the Audio Control menu;
then make sure of the following:
Make sure that Mute of both the INPUT SOURCE and the
MASTER are set to off.
Make sure that Line and CD are selected as the input
source.
2 Open the Accessories group; then open the Media Player.
3 Select Device from the Media Player window; then select CD
Audio from the pull-down menu.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 31

Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged
Your computer is a delicate device that requires careful handling. To
keep it from being damaged, keep these precautions in mind:

Do not allow your computer to be subject to any physical shock.

Do not place anything heavy on your computer.
Do not pour liquid into your computer.
Do not leave any objects (especially metal objects) in the
computer.
Keep the computer at least 13 cm (5 in.) away from any
electrical appliance that generates a strong magnetic field such
as a motor, magnet, TV, refrigerator, or large audio speakers.
Use your computer when temperatures are between 5°C to 35°C
(41°F to 95°F).
Do not disassemble the computer.
Do not scratch, twist, hit, or push the surface of the LCD.
Remove the battery pack and keep it in a cool place if you will
not be using the computer for a long period of time.

The removable hard disk drive and diskette drive are also very
delicate devices that need careful handling. To avoid damage, do
not press on them, drop them, or apply any shock to them when they
are removed from the computer.

Do not press on the middle part of the diskette drive.

Insert a diskette straight into the diskette drive. Inserting it at an
angle can damage the front of the diskette drive.
Do not place more than one diskette label on a diskette. Two or
more labels can cause a label to tear apart inside the drive and
cause damage to the diskette drive.

Occasionally clean your computer as follows:

Use a soft cloth moistened with nonalkaline detergent to wipe the

exterior of the computer.
Gently wipe the LCD with a dry, soft cloth. Do not use alcohol or
detergent.

32 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer

This chapter provides information about the use of your computer.

Using the ThinkPad Features Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Using the PS2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using Easy-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing the Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using the LCD and an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Changing the Resolution or Color Depth for the LCD . . . . 41
Attaching an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using the PC Card Director Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Starting PC Card Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Restrictions on the PC Cards Supported by the Computer . 46
PC Card Limitations under Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the PC Card in Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the Option Diskette for the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . 47
Removing the Storage PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using the Infrared Communication Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the Mwave DSP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using the Audio Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Audio Function for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Audio Function for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using the Audio Function for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using the Telephony Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the Modem with OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the Modem with DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the Modem with Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using Country Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the ESS AudioDrive Sound feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the Audio Function for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the Audio Function for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the MIDI/Joystick Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Attaching a Television to the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Features . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Functions for
OS/2 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using the MPEG Playback for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 33

Operating Your Computer

Using the Video-in (Video Capture and Video Overlay) for

OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Common Restrictions for Video Capture/Overlay and MPEG
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Functions for
Windows 3.11 and Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the MPEG Playback for Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . 71
Using the MPEG Playback for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . 73
Using the Video-in (Video Capture and Video Overlay) for
Windows 3.11 and Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using the Digital Video Producer for Windows . . . . . . . 77
Using the Overlay with Media Player for Windows . . . . 81
Operational Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

34 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

To install the ThinkPad Features ThinkPad Features is a control program that allows you to
program: configure your computer. Using the ThinkPad Features program,
Chapter 7. you can easily set up and customize the built-in devices, such as the
parallel port or infrared port.

It also provides the Device Configuration Management System,

which automatically detects a system resource (such as IRQ, DMA,
I/O address, or memory) conflict, so that you can easily set up your
computer configuration for the new device or software. For more
detail about each device's resource, see Appendix A.
To start the ThinkPad Features program:
If you are using OS/2 Warp or Windows, select the ThinkPad
O S / 2 WIN Features icon in your operating system:
ThinkPad Features
WIN WIN

Note:
Any buttons on the screen that
appear in gray are options that
cannot be set.

Default Cancel

If you are using DOS, you can use the PS2 commands at the
DOS DOS command prompt, instead of this panel.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 35

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Other ThinkPad Utilities

ThinkPad Features program group also provides various features:

Fuel-Gauge program: Fuel-Gauge program
Page 89.
– Remaining power percentage
– Current power mode
– Discharge options
Note: Docking control
For details about docking control
program, see the manual that came
with the docking station.

Personalization Editor program: Personalization Editor

Page 116.

Using the PS2 Commands

You can use the ThinkPad Features program from the DOS or OS/2
command prompt using PS2 commands. Type PS2 ? at the DOS
prompt to display the ThinkPad Features online help menu.

You can create a batch file to set your unique operating environment
quickly and easily. The following sample batch file allows you to set
up an operational environment that is suitable for traveling and can
result in longer battery operation time.

@Echo Off

Rem SAMPLE: Set the parameters to provide maximum power utilization.

Rem ================================================================

PS2 PMode Custom DC > Nul

PS2 LCd 3 > Nul
PS2 DISK 3 > Nul
PS2 POwer 5 > Nul
PS2 SPeed Fixed MIN > Nul
PS2 STandby 3 > Nul
PS2 IR OFf > Nul
PS2 SErial OFf > Nul

36 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Easy-Setup

Using Easy-Setup
The computer has a built-in system setup function called
Easy-Setup.

Easy-Setup has the following menu:

Config shows information about installed memory and system
board.
Date/Time is used to set the current date and time.
To set passwords: Password is used to set the power-on password, hard disk
Page 102. password, and supervisor password.
To change the startup sequence: Start up is used to change the startup sequence of your
Page 38. computer.
To test the computer: Test is used to test the computer hardware.
Page 233.
Restart is used to exit Easy-Setup and start your operating
system.
To start Easy-Setup:
1 Turn off the computer, and remove any diskette from the
diskette drive.
Note: 2 Press and hold F1; then turn on the computer. Hold F1 until
You can change the screen color of the Easy-Setup menu appears.
the Easy-Setup menu with the key
combinations of Ctrl+PgUp or
Ctrl+PgDn. Use Ctrl+Home to
restore the original screen color. Easy-Setup

Config Date/Time Password Start up Test

BIOS part number,..Date nnnnnnn 12/31/96

System-unit serial number nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
System board serial number nnnnnnnnnnn
Restart Microprocessor Pentium( )Process
**

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 37

Using Easy-Setup

Using the Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence

Attention: Selectable drive startup (selectable boot) allows you to control the
If you change your startup sequence, startup sequence of the drives in your computer. The order in which
you must be extremely careful when the computer searches the drives for your operating system is the
you do write operations (such as
drive-startup sequence. If you are working with multiple operating
copying, saving, or formatting). Your
systems, you might want to change the drive-startup sequence to
data or programs can be overwritten
if you select the wrong drive. load an operating system from the hard disk or a PC Card without
checking the diskette drive, or to do a remote program load (RPL).

3 4

HDD-3 HDD-4 PCMCIA

The HDD-1 icon represents the internal hard disk drive installed in
the computer. (If the second hard disk drive is installed in the
UltraBay, it is shown as HDD-2.) The other numbered HDD icons
are external hard disk drives.

FDD-1 represents the first diskette drive found during system

startup. When no diskette drive is installed in the UltraBay and if an
attached docking station has a diskette drive, the diskette drive in
the docking station is the first drive.

38 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Easy-Setup

Changing the Startup Sequence

To change the startup sequence:

1 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start up icon.

2 Move the cursor to the Reset icon; then press the Spacebar.
Note: 3 Move the cursor to the icon for the first device in the startup
You cannot set a hard disk drive sequence; then press the Spacebar.
before a PCMCIA Card in the startup
sequence. Repeat this step to set the other devices for the startup
sequence. You can set up to four devices.
4 Click on OK or press Enter to save the change.

Selecting the Network RPL Speed

When you use a remote program load through a token-ring card
or other network card, the RPL speed can be selected.
1 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start up icon.
2 Move the cursor to the Network icon; then press the
Spacebar.
The window to select the token-ring RPL speed appears.
3 Move the cursor to the 4 icon (for 4 Mbps) or the 16 icon
(for 16 Mbps); then press the Spacebar and press Enter.
If you are using another card, such as an Ethernet card, you
do not need to specify the RPL speed, so press Esc to exit
this window.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 39

Using the LCD and an External Monitor

Using the LCD and an External Monitor

This section provides information about the computer LCD and an
external monitor.

You can display the computer output on the LCD, an externally

attached monitor (CRT), or both. By attaching an external monitor,
you can get higher resolution and better color quality.

The following shows the resolution and color combinations for each
display output type. It depends on your computer's LCD type:
If your LCD is the TFT 1024×768 LCD panel:

Color Depth for

Resolution Color Depth for Color Depth for
the External
↓ the LCD “Both”
Monitor (CRT)
256
256 256
640×480 65,536
65,536 65,536
16,777,216
256
256 256
800×600 65,536
65,536 65,536
16,777,216
256 256 256
1024×768
65,536 65,536 65,536
1280×1024 — — 256

If your LCD is the TFT 800×600 LCD panel:

Color Depth for

Resolution Color Depth for Color Depth for
the External
↓ the LCD “Both”
Monitor
256
256 256
640×480 65,536
65,536 65,536
16,777,216
256 256 256
800×600
65,536 65,536 65,536
1024×768 — — 256

40 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the LCD and an External Monitor

If your LCD is the DSTN 800×600 LCD panel:

Color Depth for

Resolution Color Depth for Color Depth for
the External
↓ the LCD “Both”
Monitor
256
640×480 256 256 65,536
16,777,216
256
800×600 256 256
65,536
1024×768 — — 256

Changing the Resolution or Color Depth for the LCD

To change the screen resolution or color depth for the LCD panel,
do the following:
If you use OS/2 Warp or Windows 3.11, use the ThinkPad Features
O S / 2 WIN
program. (Click on the Display ( or ) icon.)

Note
To change the resolution or color depth for WIN-OS/2, use the
ThinkPad Features program in WIN-OS/2.

If you use Windows 95, use the Windows 95 Control Panel. Select
WIN
My Computer, Control Panel, Display, and then Settings.

If you use Windows NT, use the Windows NT Control Panel.

WIN

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 41

Attaching an External Monitor

Attaching an External Monitor

Note: To attach an external monitor:
When installing an operating system,
you must install the ThinkPad display 1 Change the display output type (where to display the computer
driver before you can use an external output) as follows so that you can see the computer output on
monitor. the external monitor:
a) Start the ThinkPad Features program.
To install the display driver:
b) Click on each of the following icons:
Chapter 7.

Note: The CRT ( ) icon to display information on the

You can use the Fn key function external monitor.
(Fn+F7) or PS2 SC command to
change the display output type. The Both ( ) icon to display information on both the
LCD and external monitor.
Attention:
When you select Both, do not attach (The LCD ( ) icon to display information on the
an external monitor that supports LCD.)
only VGA mode (640-by-480
resolution). Otherwise, the screen 2 Set the monitor type and the display driver:
size looks smaller, or the external
monitor screen will be scrambled and
the output will not be displayed (or
the screen might be damaged).

a) Click on the Display ( or ) icon in the ThinkPad

Features program.

42 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Attaching an External Monitor

Note: b) Click on the Advanced... button.

Refer to the specifications for your
external monitor to determine its
You can select your display type from the monitor list, or click on
supported resolutions and refresh a new resolution or refresh rate.
rates. c) Restart the computer to make the changes effective.

Hints
When you are using OS/2 or Windows, the virtual screen
function is available with the ThinkPad Features program. It is
used to display a part of the high-resolution screen image that is
produced by the computer. Other parts can be seen by moving
the screen with the TrackPoint III or other pointing device.

Attention: 3 Connect the external monitor to the computer:

Do not disconnect the external
monitor while the computer is in a) Turn off the computer.
suspend mode or hibernation mode.
b) Attach the external monitor to the external monitor
If no external monitor is attached
when the computer resumes, the connector ( ) at the rear of the computer and then to
LCD will remain blank and the output the electrical outlet.
will not be displayed. This does not
depend on the resolution value. c) Turn on the external monitor and the computer.

When Changing the Display Settings

When you are using OS/2 Warp:
Do not use System in the System Setup folder to change the
resolution or color depth. Use the ThinkPad Features
program to configure the display.
To change the display settings for WIN-OS/2, use the
ThinkPad Features program in WIN-OS/2.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 43

Using PC Cards

Using PC Cards
To insert a PC Card: With a PC Card, you can send and receive faxes, communicate
Page 122. through a network, or store data. This section describes how to use
the PCMCIA software and some considerations.
Supported PC Card specification:
Page 293.

Using the PC Card Director Program

To install the PC Card Director: Your computer comes with an advanced IBM program for PCMCIA
Chapter 7. called PC Card Director, which makes using PC Cards with your
computer easier by:
Turning on and setting up a PC Card when you insert it in a PC
Card slot (common enablers).
Showing what type of PC Card is in your computer.
Allowing you to register an application program for a particular
PC Card and starting the program automatically when the card
is inserted.

To see the PC Cards list supported by PC Card Director, click on

the Supported PC Cards icon in the PC Card Director window. If
your PC Card is not listed, try using it with PC Card Director
anyway.

If your PC Card is not supported by PC Card Director, you must

install the driver that came with your card. The card driver must be
compatible with the PCMCIA Card Services PC Card Standard
(1995) or the PCMCIA Card Services Standard Release 2.1. Follow
the instructions in your PC Card manual to install the driver.

44 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

Starting PC Card Director

To start PC Card Director in OS/2 or Windows, select the PC Card

O S / 2 WIN WIN Director folder or window; then select the PC Card Director icon.

See PC Card Director help on how to use PC Card Director.

For OS/2:

PC Card Director - Icon View

PC Card Director Mount Utility Auto Configurator Utility Supported PC Cards

For Windows 3.11:

PC Card Director

PC Card Driver's Auto

Director Selector Configurator
Utility

ATA Mount PC Card Supported PC

Utility Director Cards
Launcher

For Windows 95:

PC Card Director PC Card Director

To start PC Card Director for DOS:

DOS
1 Go to the DOS command prompt.
2 Type C:\THINKPAD\EZPLAY at the command prompt; then press
Enter.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 45

Using PC Cards

Restrictions on the PC Cards Supported by the Computer

The PC Card slots of the computer and the SelectaDock Docking
O S / 2 WIN System do not support the following PC Cards:
Integral** Peripherals Model 1841PA (40MB)
IBM 105MB PCMCIA hard disk drive (P/N 74G8694)
8-bit or 16-bit slave DMA PC Cards
Ask IBM or an IBM authorized dealer for more information about the
different types of PC Cards.

For more information about PC Cards, see Appendix B.

PC Card Limitations under Suspend Mode

Although some PC Cards can be inserted or removed without turning
off the computer (refer to the instructions that came with the PC
Card), you cannot remove or install PC Cards during suspend mode.

Using the PC Card in Windows 95

When using PC Cards in Windows 95, do not use the interrupt
WIN
function. After enabling the PCMCIA socket (PC Card slots),
change the resource for the PCMCIA socket as follows:

1 Start Windows 95 and double-click on My Computer; then

select Control Panel.
2 Select System; then select the Device Manager tab.
3 Select PCMCIA socket; then select PCIC or compatible
PCMCIA controller on IBM system.
4 Select the Resources tab.

5 If Basic configuration 0000 is set for the Setting based on:,

click on Use automatic settings to disable it; then change
0000 to Basic configuration 0001.
6 Select OK.

46 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

7 If the Creating a Forced Configuration panel appears, select

Yes.
8 At the System Properties panel, select Close.

Using the Option Diskette for the PC Card

Option diskettes, which came with some PC Cards, might include
PCMCIA software (Socket Service driver: IBMDSS01.SYS) that does
not support your computer. So, when using the diagnostic program
or the installation program in that kind of option diskette, do the
following:
1 Check whether your option diskette has the file named
IBMDSS01.SYS. Did you find the IBMDSS01.SYS file?
Yes Go to the next step.
No Go to step 5.
2 Make a backup copy diskette of the option diskette.
3 Copy the following two files to the backup copy diskette from
the PC Card Director Diskette for DOS and Windows:
IBMDSS14.SYS
IBMDOSCS.SYS
4 Update a line in the CONFIG.SYS file in the backup copy
diskette as follows:
(old) DEVICE=A:\IBMDSS 1.SYS

DEVICE=A:\IBMDSS14.SYS
5 Run the diagnostic or installation program in the backup copy
diskette, referring to the manual of the PC Card.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 47

Using PC Cards

Removing the Storage PC Cards

Attention
Before removing such storage PC Cards as the hard disk PC
Card, flash memory PC Card, or SRAM PC Card from the PC
Card slot, turn off the computer. Otherwise, data in the PC
Card may be corrupted or lost.

However, there is a safe way to remove the storage PC Card

without turning off the computer. Use the PC Card Director program
(for OS/2 or Windows) or the DOS PC Card utility program as
follows:
For OS/2 or Windows:
OS/2 WIN WIN
1 Open the PC Card Director window.
2 Click on the Control Power icon.
3 Select from the card list the storage PC Card you want to
remove.
4 Click on Off.
5 Make sure the card status is off; then remove the storage PC
Card.
For DOS: Enter CARDPWR slot_number OFF at the DOS command
DOS prompt.
slot_number means the PC Card slot number.
You can use the EZPLAY program to check the slot number.

48 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

Hints—When Not Using the Optional PC Card Slots in OS/2 or

O S / 2 WIN Windows 3.11

When you do not use the following optional PC Card slots, you can
remove the display of the PC Card slot icons representing slots that
do not exist from the PC Card Director program's window by
modifying the CONFIG.SYS file:
When you are not using any of the following:
– Dock I or Dock II
– Port Replicator equipped with the PC Card slots
– PCMCIA Cartridge option for the UltraBay
Delete or comment out the following lines in the CONFIG.SYS
file:
– For Windows:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS 4.SYS /D
– For OS/2:
BASEDEV=IBM2SS 4.SYS /D

When you are not using the SelectaDock Docking System,

delete the underlined /D option from the following line of the
CONFIG.SYS file:
– For Windows:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS14.SYS /D

– For OS/2:
BASEDEV=IBM2SS14.SYS /D
If you do not modify the CONFIG.SYS file as just described, the
PC Card slots work correctly; however, the two PC Card slot
icons representing slots that do not exist appear in the PC Card
Director program's window.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 49

Communicating with the Infrared Port

Using the Infrared Communication Feature

To install the infrared device driver: Your computer is equipped with an infrared (IR) communication
Chapter 7 . feature that allows point-to-point communication. The computer has
two infrared ports, one in the front of the computer below the hard
To use TranXit (an infrared disk drive compartment and another on the rear of the computer.
application):
Page 15. The infrared feature supports the following three modes:
ThinkPad mode (IrDA High Speed extension, up to 1.15
megabits per second data transfer).
Use this mode when communicating with another 755 or 760
series ThinkPad computer with an infrared port or other
systems supporting ThinkPad mode.
Generic (IrDA 1.0, up to 115 kilobits per second data transfer
through a COM port).
Use this mode when communicating with generic infrared
communication device, such as Hewlett-Packard** 100LX,
200LX, Omnibook, Mind Path Remote Control IR55 F/X, or
others.
Sharp** (ASK) (9600 bits per second data transfer through a
COM port).
Use this mode when communicating with the Sharp Wizard**
or other systems with infrared ports supporting Sharp mode.

To communicate between your computer and another computer, you

need to run the same communication application on both computers.
Refer to the application manuals for more information.

50 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Mwave DSP Features

Using the Mwave DSP Features

760 The computer provides the Media Processor (Mwave DSP) feature,
Mwave
which is based on the digital signal processor (DSP). It gives you
high performance for audio and telephony functions.
Note:
In some countries, the Mwave
telephony functions are only
This illustration shows the connections between the computer and
available with the DAA/Telephony Kit external cables or devices:
option installed.

Microphone/Line-in
When the DAA/Telephony Kit is installed:
Jack

Modem/Fax Port Microphone/Line-in

Jack
Headphone Modem/Fax Port
Jack

Headphone
Headset Jack Data Access
Arrangement

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 51

Using the Mwave DSP Features

To install the Mwave DSP support The Mwave DSP feature supports the following functions for each
software: operating system:
Chapter 7.

For OS/2:
OS/2

Mwave for OS/2 - Icon View

Auxiliary Country Mwave Help Mwave Modem OS/2 Modem

Control Help Read Me
Selection

– Wave audio recording and playback

– MIDI synthesizer
– Sound Blaster support in the DOS session
– Data/Fax modem
– MPEG Audio
For Windows:
WIN WIN WIN
Mwave ThinkPad Audio Control
Country Selection
Note:
Mwave Command Reference
The figure shows the Mwave menu
for Windows 95. Mwave Help
Mwave Modem

Read Me
View Connectors

– Wave audio recording and playback

– MIDI synthesizer
– Sound Blaster support in the DOS session
– Data/Fax modem
– Speaker phone
– Telephone answering machine
– MPEG Audio
For DOS:
DOS
– Sound Blaster support
– Data/Fax modem

52 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Mwave Audio Function

Using the Audio Function

Use the Mwave audio functions according to your operating system.

Using the Audio Function for OS/2

The Mwave feature supports audio in the OS/2 environment through

O S / 2

the Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 (MMPM/2). To use the

Mwave audio functions with OS/2, open the Multimedia folder from
Note: the OS/2 desktop.
Do not enter suspend mode when
using the audio functions.
When Using a CD-ROM or a Music CD
Control
Aux Source 760
CD
Line/CD When you use a CD-ROM or a music
Mic CD with your computer, make sure of the
None
following:
1. Open the Mwave for OS/2 folder in the
OS/2 desktop.
2. Double-click on Auxiliary Control.
3. Make sure that Line/CD is selected as
the auxiliary source.
Note: Select Mic when you want to use the
computer as a microphone-speaker.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 53

Using the Mwave Audio Function

Using the Audio Function for Windows

To use Mwave audio in Windows, open an audio application such as

WIN WIN WIN Media Player or Sound Recorder in the Windows Accessories
group.
Note:
To use the Mwave audio features in To control the audio input or output, do the following:
WIN-OS/2, install the Mwave DSP 1 Select Mwave ThinkPad from Windows.
support software for Windows in the
full screen WIN-OS/2 session. 2 Select Audio Control. The following windows appears:
Mwave Audio Mixer
To install the Mwave DSP support Controls Viewed:
INPUT SOURCE GAMES WAVE MIDI MASTER
Play Record
software:
Chapter 7.
Mic Treble Bass
Tone Control
Line

CD
QSound

Chorus Reverb
Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute
Effects

This window allows you to maintain control over volume, balance,

tone, and effects for all audio components and input sources. For
more information, see Mwave Help in the Mwave ThinkPad window.

Using the Audio Function for DOS

The Mwave feature supports audio for DOS games through Sound
DOS Blaster support.

To enable Sound Blaster support for DOS games:

1 Type FASTCFG at the command prompt; then press Enter.
The FASTCFG utility opens.
2 Select Games; then select OK.

54 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Mwave Audio Function

Solving a Memory Shortage Problem for Your Games

If you do not have enough memory for your games, you should
make a boot diskette before starting the DOS games. To make a
boot diskette, do the following:
1 Start DOS and insert a blank diskette into the diskette drive.
2 Type MAKEBOOT at the DOS prompt; then press Enter.
A boot diskette is created. Before starting your games, restart
the computer with this boot diskette inserted in the diskette
drive.

Some sample files, such as the CONFIG.SYS file, are created on

the boot diskette. You might need to modify these files by referring
to the manuals that came with your games.
Default Values for DOS Games Audio
Most games automatically determine the I/O address, interrupt level
(IRQ), and DMA channel settings for the audio for DOS games. If
the game asks for this information, specify the default settings for
Sound Blaster as follows:
I/O Address 220
IRQ 5
DMA Channel 1
ThinkPad Features program: If you need to change these settings, use the ThinkPad Features
Page 35. program.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 55

Using the Mwave Telephony Function

Using the Telephony Function

Note: The computer is equipped with a modem/fax port on its side that
In some countries, the Mwave connects a telephone cable. This section describes how to connect
telephony functions are only the cable to the computer, and it describes the telephony features
available with the DAA/Telephony Kit
that can be used for communication.
option installed. To install a
DAA/Telephony Kit on the computer, Note
see “Installing the DAA/Telephony
Kit” on page 149 and the Non-U.S. users must run the Country Selection program ( ) in
documentation that came with the
the Mwave window after the Mwave installation is complete.
option.
(See page 58.)

CAUTION:
Your computer can use only a public-switched telephone
network (PSTN). Do not use a PBX (private branch exchange)
or other digital telephone extension lines. Use of phone lines
other than PSTN can damage your modem. If you are not sure
which kind of phone line you are using, contact your telephone
company. Many hotels or office buildings use digital telephone
extension lines, so check before connecting the telephone
cable in such places.

To use the telephony functions, you need to connect a telephone line

to your computer.

DANGER

To avoid shock hazard, do not connect the cable to or

disconnect the cable from the telephone outlet on the
wall during electrical storms.

56 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Mwave Telephony Function

Note: When your computer has a modem/fax port with a square

If you use both the computer and a receptacle, first connect the ferrite-core end (connector 1 ) of the
telephone with one telephone cable, telephone cable to the modem/fax port; then connect the other end
use the telephone cable supplied ( 2 ) to the telephone outlet on the wall.
with your computer.
If you use the DAA/Telephony Kit
(available as an option), see page
151.

Important
Make sure you use the correct telephone line so your modem
operates correctly. When you are:
At home: Use an analog line, a standard household
telephone.
In your office: Use a line connected to a fax machine or
another modem.
In a hotel: Request a room with a data or normal telephone
line.
Your RJ11 jack must be wired for an analog line. If you are not
sure what type of line you are connecting, check with the
telephone company.

Using the Modem with OS/2

To start the Mwave modem with OS/2 Warp, do the following:

O S/2

1 Open the Mwave ThinkPad folder.

2 Double-click on the Mwave Modem icon.
The Mwave modem starts automatically.
3 Start your communication program.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 57

Using the Mwave Telephony Function

Using the Modem with DOS

To start the Mwave modem with DOS, do the following:

DOS
1 Type FASTCFG at the DOS prompt; then press Enter.
The FASTCFG utility opens.
2 Select Advanced Modem; then select OK.
3 Start your communication program.

Using the Modem with Windows

When you start Windows, the Mwave modem automatically starts

WIN WIN WIN and will be ready to use.

Using Country Selection

Important
Each country has restrictions on communication that uses
telephone lines. Use this window whenever you travel to other
countries.

The Country Selection window allows you to change the country

name currently supported by the Mwave telephony features. When
you travel to other countries and use the Mwave telephony function,
you need to select the country name from the list of countries in this
window.

58 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the ESS AudioDrive Sound feature

Using the ESS AudioDrive Sound feature

760 This section provides information about the audio functions
ESS
supported by the ESS AudioDrive Sound feature. The ESS
AudioDrive supports for Sound Blaster Pro applications.
Note:
Do not enter suspend mode when
using the audio functions.

Using the Audio Function for OS/2

The ESS AudioDrive feature supports audio in the OS/2 environment

OS/2
through the Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 (MMPM/2). To use
the ESS AudioDrive functions with OS/2, open the Multimedia folder
from the OS/2 desktop.

Using the Audio Function for Windows

To use ESS AudioDrive in Windows, click on the Audio

WIN WIN Applications icon in the Main Program group. The following screen
appears:
Audio Applications

Volume Control Mixer Recording

Control

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 59

Using the MIDI/Joystick Port

Using the MIDI/Joystick Port

760 The Enhanced Video model provides a MIDI/joystick port on the rear
EnhVideo
of the computer for MIDI (musical instrument digital interface)
equipment or a joystick for playing games. A MIDI/joystick cable is
supplied with the computer to connect a joystick. When connecting
MIDI equipment, you have to purchase a MIDI connector to connect
musical instruments with MIDI ports.

To attach the MIDI/joystick cable to the computer:

1 Turn off the computer and connect the MIDI/joystick cable to
the computer as shown:

2 Connect the other side of the cable to a MINI-DIN cable or a

connector that connects to your MIDI equipment or joystick.
3 Enable the MIDI/joystick port using the ThinkPad Features
OS/2 WIN WIN program:
a) Start the ThinkPad Features program.

b) Select the MIDI/joystick ( ) icon.

c) Click on Enable for MIDI or joystick; then click on OK.
d) Restart the computer.

60 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 How to Attach a Television to the Computer

Attaching a Television to the Computer

760 You can attach a television (NTSC or PAL) to the computer and
EnhVideo
display the computer output on it.

To display the computer output on the attached television, do the

following:

1 Attach the television to the computer as follows:

a) Turn off the computer and television.
b) Connect the video in-out cable 2 to the video-out port
( ) 1 at the left side of the computer; then connect your
television.

Video In Audio-In Left

S-Video In
Audio-In Right
1

A or B

To headphone jack
of the computer

Cables, except for the video in-out cable 2 , are not

supplied with the computer.
If you are using video equipment with S-video input,
connect the S-video port of the video in-out cable to the
S-video-in connector of your video equipment ( A ) for
better picture quality.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 61

How to Attach a Television to the Computer

If you are not using video equipment with S-video input,

connect the composite video port of the video in-out
cable and the video-in connector of your video
equipment ( B ).
If your video equipment has only one audio input
connector, use the left-audio connector on the audio
cable.
2 Enable the video-out port:
a) Start the ThinkPad Features program. and select the
Enhanced Video ( ) icon.
b) Click on Enable Video-Out.
Note
Do not select Enable Video-out in the ThinkPad
Features program's Enhanced video ( ) screen,
unless you have attached a television to the computer.
Otherwise, the LCD screen becomes blank. In this
case, use the Fn+F7 keys to restore the LCD screen.

3 Select the appropriate television color standard: NTSC (default)

or PAL. To do this, start the ThinkPad Features program and
select the Enhanced video ( ) icon; then select NTSC or
PAL.
4 Restart the computer to make the change effective, if you
switch the color standard between NTSC and PAL.
When you use a PAL television attached to the computer, you
can select 800×600 and 640×480 resolution modes. When you
use an NTSC television attached to the computer, you can
select only 640×480 resolution mode.

62 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 How to Attach a Television to the Computer

Switching Output between the LCD and the Television

Note: When you attached a television to the computer, you can select
Even if you selected television where to display computer output using:
output, whenever you turn on the
computer, its output is always The Fn+F7 keys.
displayed first on the LCD.
The ThinkPad Features program:

Note: – CRT ( ) for the television

You cannot display the computer
output on the LCD and television at – LCD ( ) for the LCD
the same time.
Entering a PS2 SC command from the command prompt.
For OS/2
When you use OS/2 on a television attached to the computer, do
not switch between a full-screen session and an OS/2
Presentation Manager (PM) session: Otherwise, the screen will
black out or be corrupted. To avoid this, switch to the LCD using
the Fn+F7 keys, before you go to the full-screen session or
return to the PM session. And then switch to the television.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 63

How to Attach a Television to the Computer

Displaying Output on the External SVGA Monitor

Note
You can attach both a television and an SVGA monitor to the
computer; however, you can display the computer output on only
one of the two at the same time. To switch between those two,
you need to use the ThinkPad Features program.

To display computer output on the attached external SVGA monitor

after using the television, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer and attach the SVGA monitor to the
external-monitor connector at the rear of the computer.
2 Turn on the computer and start the ThinkPad Features
program.

3 Click on the CRT ( ) icon; then click on Enable External

Display.

64 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Features

760 The Enhanced Video feature provides the video overlay/capture and
EnhVideo
MPEG functions and video in-out port on the side of the computer to
attach your home video equipment. It also provides the total image
video with MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 HHR (half-horizontal resolution).

With the Enhanced Video feature, you can take advantage of the
following:
MPEG playback: The MPEG playback viewer can play back
many available CD-i movies, video CDs, and karaoke MPEG
video titles. No DOS/CD-i game titles are currently supported.
MPEG2 titles are restricted to HHR at 4 Mbps.
Video-in (video capture):
– Capture still images or motion video from the video-in port.
– Overlay motion video from the video-in port.
Video-out: To use the video-out function, see “Attaching a
Television to the Computer” on page 61.

When using the video overlay/capture and MPEG functions, keep the
following in mind:
You cannot enable or disable the Enhanced Video feature, or
change from video-in to video-out, while the playback or capture
window is open. Close the playback or capture window before
you make changes.
The MPEG playback and the video-in (video capture) functions
use the same hardware resources. Only one of the two
functions can be used at the same time. For the same reason,
two MPEG functions cannot be used at the same time.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 65

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Using the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Functions for

OS/2 Warp
This section describes how to use the video overlay/capture and
OS/2
MPEG functions in OS/2.
You need at least 12MB of memory to play MPEG or to capture
video from the video-in port using Video IN.
When reinstalling the video overlay/capture and MPEG device
drivers, install Video IN from the BonusPak, preloaded on the
computer, prior to the device drivers.
When the Enhanced Video feature is enabled by the ThinkPad
Features program, and any of the following is being played or
used, do not enter suspend mode:
– AVI file
– MPEG file
– Video CD
– CD-i
– Video-in feature
Make sure you close the application that plays any of these files
before entering suspend mode.

Using the MPEG Playback for OS/2

To use MPEG playback function in OS/2, open the Multimedia

folder and do one of the following:
When you want to play MPEG files:
1 Select the Digital Video 3 icon, and click on File on the
tool bar.
2 Select Open to specify the MPEG file name.
3 Select OK.

66 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Note: When you want to play a video CDs or CD-i movies from the
The Video CD Player program CD-ROM drive of your computer, select the Video CD Player
cannot play some video CDs. If you icon.
cannot play your video CD, click on
the Digital Video 3 icon instead; MPEG under WIN-OS/2
then follow the instructions on the
screen. WIN-OS/2 does not support the playing of MPEG files.
When you select IBM MPEG-2, MPEG Video, or CD-i/VideoCD
in the Device Driver folder of Media Player, the following error
message might appear:
IBM MPEG: This driver can NOT be loaded under Win-OS2
When you click on Video CD Player, the following error
message appears:
Win32s Error ...
Ignore any error messages; then click on OK to exit the error
message screen.

The following shows considerations when using the MPEG playback

in OS/2 Warp:
When you run other tasks while an MPEG file is being played,
the MPEG file image might be distorted temporarily.
The bar displaying the running time for the video CD might not
be exact.
You cannot play two MPEG files at the same time. Also, you
cannot play the MPEG file while using the video-in function. If
you try to do this, the following error message is displayed:
Unable to open device 'IBM MPEG-enh Vid 3', use the
Multimedia Set up program to ensure that the file
is associated to a MMPM/2 device.

Using the Video-in (Video Capture and Video Overlay) for OS/2
You can capture still images or motion video using video capture
application Video IN supported by MMPM/2, and the video-in port of
the computer.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 67

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

To capture motion video:

1 Turn off the computer and connect the video in-out cable 2 to
the video-in port ( ) 1 of the computer; then connect your
video equipment.
Cables, except for the video in-out cable 2 , are not supplied
with the computer.
Video Out Audio-Out Left

S-Video Out
Audio-Out Right

A or B

To microphone jack
of the computer

If you are using video equipment with S-video output,

connect the S-video port of the video in-out cable to the
S-video-out connector of your video equipment A for
better picture quality.
If you are not using video equipment with S-video output,
connect the composite video port of the video in-out cable
and the video-out port of your video equipment B .
If your video equipment has only one audio output
connector, use the left-audio connector on the audio cable
for connection.
2 Check the Enhanced Video status.
a) Open the ThinkPad Features program and select the
Enhanced Video ( ) icon.

68 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

b) If Video capture/MPEG status is enabled, go to step 4 on

page 69.
If not, continue to the next step.
c) Click on Advanced; then click on the 1st IRQ list box and
assign an IRQ for the device. (The default IRQ is 11.)
3 Restart the computer to make the IRQ setting take effect.
4 Open the Multimedia folder in OS/2.
5 Click on the Video IN Recorder icon.
For more information on how to use video-in function in OS/2,
use Help.
Note
When you use the video-in recorder in OS/2, you can use
only Ultimotion Real-Time Compression as the
compression type. Other compression types are not
supported even if they are listed on the screen.

The following shows considerations when using the video-in feature

or video capture in OS/2:
Only one capture window can be open at a time.
Video-IN Recorder is an OS/2 MMPM/2 application for video
capture and video overlay. Its video capture size (width and
length) is limited to up to 320×240 pixels (for a NTSC video
source) or 384×288 pixels (for a PAL video source).
Also, largesize capture, for example, 640×480 for NTSC or over
768×576 for PAL, might be not available with your computer. If
you try capturing large images, the captured image will not look
as expected, or the capture application will be suspended with
the following error message:
SWVR118: The recording initialization failed return code is
5 8 - system out of memory
If you have this error message, close Video-IN; then restart it.
Before trying again, set the capture size to a smaller one.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 69

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Common Restrictions for Video Capture/Overlay and MPEG

Playback
You must be aware of the following when using the video
capture/overlay functions or the MPEG playback functions.
Otherwise, the video image might not be visible on the computer
screen or the television, or the computer might become locked up or
suspended. In these cases, close the Video-IN Recorder or Digital
Video Player and restart it, or restart the computer.
You can use only one video application at a time—for example,
you cannot capture video while playing back an MPEG file. If
you use multiple applications, an error message appears on the
screen and the computer might become locked up or suspended.
In that case, restart the computer.
Do not enter suspend mode while attempting video capture or
overlay.
Do not use the Enhanced Video functions (such as capturing or
overlaying video using the Video-IN Recorder, or playing back
the MPEG files using the Digital Video Player) in the following
display modes:
– 1024×768 resolution, 256 color depth, and 75Hz refresh rate
– 1024×768, 65,536, and 75Hz
– all 1280×1024 resolution mode
Otherwise, the image might be corrupted.
Do not select virtual screen in the ThinkPad Features program.
Video overlay and capture are not supported in virtual screen
mode, such as 1024×768 on an LCD or 800×600 on a television.

70 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Using the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Functions for

Windows 3.11 and Windows 95
This section describes how to use the video overlay/capture and
WIN WIN MPEG functions in Windows 3.11 and Windows 95.
To use the MPEG playback in Windows 3.11: See “Using the
MPEG Playback for Windows 3.11.”
To use the MPEG playback in Windows 95: See “Using the
MPEG Playback for Windows 95” on page 73.
To use the video-in (video capture and overlay) in Windows 3.11
and Windows 95: See “Using the Video-in (Video Capture and
Video Overlay) for Windows 3.11 and Windows 95” on page 75.

Using the MPEG Playback for Windows 3.11

To use MPEG playback in Microsoft Windows 3.11, do the following:

WIN
1 Open Media Player.
2 Click on Device.
3 Do one of the following:
When you want to play MPEG files, select IBM MPEG-2.
When you want to play a movie or CD, select
CD-i/VideoCD.
4 When you want to play a video CD or CD-i movie from the
CD-ROM drive of your computer, click on the Play ( ) icon.
Otherwise, select the MPEG file you want to play; then click on
the Play ( ) icon.

You can also use the IBM Video CD Player program to play a video
CD or CD-i in Windows. For information on how to use this
application, Help is available in the Video CD Player screen.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 71

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

The following are considerations when using the MPEG playback

function in Windows 3.11:
Smart drive caching of the CD-ROM drive
To be able to play CD-i movies, do not cache the CD-ROM drive
by the SMARTDRV Version 5.0 or 5.1, which is supplied with PC
DOS Version 7.0.
Video CD Player program
– The chapter-control-related functions might not work with
some karaoke CDs.
– Check the following if you do not have enough audio volume
with the Video CD Player program:
- The audio volume of the Video CD Player program
- The WAVE and MASTER volume control of the Mwave
Audio Control menu
- The speaker volume control on the computer
Drive letter for MCI** video CD/CD-i and Video CD Player
To change the drive letter for MCI video CD/CD-i and Video CD
Player:
1 Select Control Panel from the Main folder.
2 Select Drivers.
3 Select [MCI] CD-i/VideoCD.
4 Click on Setup.
5 Change the drive letter.

72 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Using the MPEG Playback for Windows 95

The MPEG feature enables hardware to decode MPEG playback

WIN
files under playback application programs.

Important—Before Using Video CDs in Windows 95

When you play your video CDs, the playback speed might be slow or playback might stop
intermittently. To get a smooth playback of video CDs, disable the current CD-ROM driver and
install the CD-ROM driver for DOS/Windows. Do the following:
1 Start Windows 95.
2 Disable the 32-bit storage driver:
a) Select My Computer, Control Panel, and then System.
b) Click on the Performance tab; then click on the File System button.
c) Click on the Troubleshooting tab.
d) Check Disable all 32 bit protect-mode disk drivers.
e) Click on Apply, OK, and then Close.
f) Select Yes to the question “Do you want to restart your computer now?” to make the
change effective.
3 Install the CD-ROM device driver for DOS/Windows:
a) Insert the ThinkPad CD-ROM Driver Diskette in the diskette drive.
b) Select Start and Run.
c) Type A:\UINSTALL; then click on OK.
d) Follow the instructions on the screen.
e) After the installation is complete, remove the diskette; then restart the computer.
You can play video CDs at a normal speed.
Note: This procedure might cause the following:

Some functional restrictions (such as the auto sense function)

Decreasing computer performance

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 73

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

To use MPEG playback in Windows 95, do the following:

1 Open Media Player.
2 Click on Device.
3 Do one of the following:
When you want to play MPEG files, select IBM MPEG-2.
When you want to play a movie or CD, select
CD-i/VideoCD.
4 When you want to play a video CD or CD-i movie from the
CD-ROM drive of your computer, click on the Play ( ) icon.
Otherwise, select the MPEG file you want to play; then click on
the Play ( ) icon.

You can also use the IBM Video CD Player program to play a video
CD or CD-i in Windows. For information on how to use this
application, Help is available in the Video CD Player screen.

The following are considerations when using the MPEG playback

function in Windows 95:
CD-i support
Windows 95 does not support playing of CD-i movies.
Video CD Player program
– The chapter-control-related functions might not work with
some karaoke CDs.
– If you do not have enough audio volume with the Video CD
Player program, check:
- The audio volume of the Video CD Player program
- The WAVE and MASTER volume control of the Mwave
Audio Control menu
- The speaker volume control on the computer
Drive letter for MCI Video CD/CD-i and Video CD Player
To change the drive letter for MCI video CD/CD-i and Video CD
Player:
1 Select Control Panel from the My Computer folder.

74 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

2 Click on the Multimedia icon.

3 Select Advanced.
4 Click on Media control device.
5 Click on [MCI] CD-i/VideoCD.
6 Confirm that “Use this Media Control device” is selected;
then select Settings.
7 Change the drive letter.

Using the Video-in (Video Capture and Video Overlay) for Windows
3.11 and Windows 95

You can use the capture applications supported by Video for

WIN WIN Windows** and your computer. You can also overlay motion video
from the video-in port by using applications supported by MCI
(Media Control Interface) overlay.

Notes:
Only one capture window can be open at a time.
When you use video capture with the overlay screen on, the
capturing screen might be distorted. However, the data is
correctly captured.

To capture motion video:

1 Turn off the computer.
2 Connect the video in-out cable 2 to the video-in port ( ) 1
of the computer; then connect your video equipment.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 75

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Video Out Audio-Out Left

S-Video Out
Audio-Out Right

A or B

To microphone jack
of the computer

Cables, except for the video in-out cable 2 , are not

supplied with the computer.
If you are using video equipment with S-video output,
connect the S-video port of the video in-out cable to the
S-video-out connector of your video equipment A for
better picture quality.
If you are not using video equipment with S-video output,
connect the composite video port of the video in-out cable
and the video-out port of your video equipment B .
If your video equipment has only one audio output
connector, use the left-audio connector on the audio cable
for connection.
3 Check the Enhanced Video status.
a) Open the ThinkPad Features program.

b) Select the Enhanced Video ( ) icon.

c) If Video capture/MPEG status is enabled, go to step 5 on
page 77.
If not, continue to the next step.

76 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

d) Click on Advanced.
e) Click on the 1st IRQ list box and assign an IRQ for the
device. (The default IRQ is 11.)
4 Restart the computer to make the IRQ setting take effect.
5 Start the video capturing application program.
If you use the Digital Video Producer (DVP) program, see
“Using the Digital Video Producer for Windows.”
If you use the Media Player, see “Using the Overlay with
Media Player for Windows” on page 81.

Using the Digital Video Producer for Windows

Digital Video Producer (DVP) is an application program that has the

WIN WIN following functions:
Capturing, compressing, and building a video file
Capturing a still image (see page 80)

Capturing, Compressing, and Building a Video File

This sample procedure describes how to capture a video clip, import

it in DVP, and build a compressed .AVI file that you can use in a
presentation and other computer-based materials. The video file
created in this example has the following characteristics. (You need
approximately 17MB of hard disk space to capture a video file.)
Frame size 160 pels by 120 pels
Frame rate 15 frames per second
Number of seconds 30 seconds
Audio sampling rates 8-bit, 11.025 kHz, mono

Important
Make sure your video source (such as a VCR or video camera) is
correctly connected to your computer before you start the video
capture. If you select overlay mode from the Options menu in
DVP Capture, you can verify the connection and look at your
video both before and during the capture.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 77

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

To capture, compress, and build a video file:

1 Start DVP; then select Video Capture from the Tools menu.
2 Select Set Capture File from the File menu.
3 Enter a name for your capture file (such as CAPTURE.AVI) and
specify the directory in which to save the file; then click on OK.
4 Select Allocate File Space from the File menu and enter 17MB
as the hard disk space to set aside for your capture file; then
click on OK.
5 Select Audio Format from the Options menu.
6 Select these sound options: 8-bit, 11kHz, and Mono. Then
click on OK.
7 Select Video Format from the Options menu.
8 Select 160×120 for Image Dimensions and Overlay YUV422 or
Compressed YUV422 for Image Format; then click on OK.
9 Select Video Source from the Options menu, the type of video
connector your video source uses (video or S-video), and the
type of video signal (NTSC or PAL).
To see the supported color standard list of countries, see the
ThinkPad Features program help.
10 Select Settings from the Capture menu and specify the
following options:
Frame Rate 15 frames per second
Enable Capture Time Limit 30 seconds
Capture Storage Capture to Disk
End Capture Using Escape Key
11 Check Capture Audio; then click on OK.
12 To start the video capture, select Video from the Capture
menu.
DVP Capture saves the file with the name you specified in step
3. You can then save the file to a new name by choosing Save
Captured File As from the File menu.

78 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

13 Select Exit from the File menu to close DVP Capture and return
to DVP.
DVP automatically imports the video file you just captured and
displays it in the Media window.
14 Drag your video clip from the Media window onto the tick bar
(directly above the video A track on the timeline).
Dragging a clip onto the tick bar is an efficient way to lay out
your clip because the video and audio information in the file
appears automatically on both the video A and audio A tracks.
You can also lay out a video clip on the timeline by dragging it
first from the Media window to a video track, and then from the
Media window to an audio track.
15 Select Compression from the Video menu to specify the
compression/decompression (CODEC) routine you want to use.
16 Select Intel** Indeo** Video R3.2 for Compressor and accept
the default values for Key Frame Every and Data Rate; then
click on OK.
17 Select Build from the Video menu. Enter the name and
location of your final .AVI file (making sure to keep the .AVI
extension); then click on Build.
The Build Progress dialog box opens, so you can look at the
percentage-complete bar and the preview window to track the
progress of the build. Building a video can take anywhere from
a few minutes to several hours, depending on its length and
complexity, and on the type of compressor you select.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 79

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Capturing a Still Image

This section describes how to capture a still image.

Important
Be sure your video source (such as a VCR or video camera) is
correctly connected to your computer before you capture the still
image. If you select overlay mode from the Options menu in
DVP Capture, you can verify the connection and look at your
image before you capture it.

To capture a still image, whose frame size is 320 pels by 240 pels:
1 Start DVP; then select Video Capture from the Tools menu.
2 Select Video Format from the Options menu; then select 320 ×
240 for Image Dimensions and Overlay YUV422 or
Compressed YUV422 for Image Format; then click on OK.
For the best color display, make sure that you install and select
the 65536 (16-bit) video display driver. For detailed information
about the display driver, see the User's Guide.
Note: 3 Select Video Source from the Options menu; then select the
Because many paint programs, such type of video connector your video source uses (video or
as Windows Paintbrush, do not yet
S-video) and the type of video signal (NTSC or PAL) for Video
support 16-bit still images, you will
Standard. Then click on OK.
typically capture 8-bit or 24-bit still
images. To see the supported color standard list of countries, see the
ThinkPad Features program help.
4 When the image you want to capture appears in the Preview
window, select Single Frame from the Capture menu.
5 Select Save Single Frame from the File menu to save it as a
bitmap file (with a .BMP extension).
Using the DVP Help System
To learn more about DVP or DVP capture, use the DVP online
Help system.

80 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

Using the Overlay with Media Player for Windows

To view a video by using the overlay function with Windows Media

WIN WIN Player, do the following:

1 Open Media Player in Windows.

2 Click on Device.
3 Select MCI OVERLAY Driver.

Operational Restrictions
The following shows restrictions when using the Enhanced Video
functions in Windows 3.11 or Windows 95:
You can use only one video application at a time—for example,
you cannot capture video while playing back an MPEG file.
Some types of video CDs cannot be viewed.
Video overlay, capture, and MPEG playback functions do not
work under the following video modes:
– 1024×768 resolution, 256 color depth, and 75Hz refresh rate
– 1024×768, 65,536, and 75Hz
– 1280×1024 and 256
– All 16 color modes
Do not select virtual screen in the ThinkPad Features program.
Video overlay, capture, and MPEG playback functions are not
supported in virtual screen mode, such as 1024×768 on an LCD
or 800×600 on a television.
For Windows 3.11 only: When you load QuickTime** for Windows
as the MCI driver, the MPEG video might not be played correctly.
To avoid this, open Control Panel in the Main window and click
on Drivers; then remove QuickTime for Windows from the driver
list.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 81

Using the Enhanced Video/MPEG Functions

82 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 4. Using Battery Power

This chapter describes battery pack operations.

Charging the Battery Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Replacing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Monitoring the Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using the Battery Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using the Fuel-Gauge Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Discharging the Battery Pack for OS/2 and Windows . . . 90
Preserving Battery-Pack Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the Battery Power-Management Function . . . . . . . 92
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Suspend Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Considerations for Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating the Hibernation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Considerations for Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 83

Charging the Battery Packs

Charging the Battery Packs

To charge the battery pack, install the battery pack in the computer
and connect the AC Adapter.

When charging starts, the battery status indicator looks like this:
. The charge indicator ( ) turns off when the battery is fully
charged.

Note: Hints
When you charge the lithium-ion
You can use an optional battery pack and install it in the
battery pack, the battery pack
UltraBay and have two battery packs for longer
temperature must be at least 10°C
(50°F). battery-powered operation.
When you have two battery packs installed in the computer
and start charging, charging starts on the battery pack in the
battery pack bay. When it is fully charged, charging starts
on the battery pack installed in the UltraBay.
If the battery pack is new or has not been used for a long
time, it will not be fully charged with only a single charging.
You will have to discharge and recharge it three to six times
to maximize battery operating time, and to keep battery
status accuracy.
The Quick Charger is available as an option to charge the
battery packs.

84 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Replacing the Battery Pack

Replacing the Battery Pack

The battery pack can be replaced with computer power on or off.
To replace the battery pack without turning off the computer, follow
these instructions:

Important
If you are using PC Cards, either connect the AC Adapter or stop
the PC Card application and remove the PC Card before doing
the following.

1 Open the LCD so it lies flat; then slide the keyboard raiser on
the side of the computer toward you so the keyboard lies flat
on the computer.

Attention: 2 Open the keyboard.

Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is The computer automatically enters suspend mode. Wait for the
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.) beep, which indicates that the computer has completely
entered suspend mode.
760
3 FDD Go to step 5 on page 86.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 85

Replacing the Battery Pack

Attention: 760
Make sure the CD-ROM tray is 4 CD Lift the handle on the CD-ROM drive with the plastic
closed and no CD is in the CD-ROM tape, and remove the CD-ROM drive.
drive. Some pressure might be needed to remove the CD-ROM drive
if it is tight.

5 Pull the battery pack toward the front of the computer; then
quickly remove the battery pack and replace it with a fully
charged spare.

2
1

760
6 FDD Go to step 8.
Attention: 760
Do not press on the middle part of
7 CD Reinstall the CD-ROM drive.
the CD-ROM drive. Make sure the CD-ROM handle snaps into place after installing
the CD-ROM drive.
8 Close the keyboard. The computer resumes normal operation.
If the computer does not resume normal operation, press the
Fn key.

86 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Battery Status Indicator

Monitoring the Battery Status

Battery power conditions can be determined through the battery
status indicator and the Fuel-Gauge program.

Using the Battery Status Indicator

The battery status indicator ( ) shows the current status of the
battery pack. Also, the remaining battery power in digits is
displayed.

Battery Remaining Status/Action Required

Status Power
Indicator (Percentage)
Note:
100%–Less Enough power remains for computer
The battery-status indicator ( ) than 25% operation.
stands for the secondary battery
pack installed in the UltraBay. 0% Empty

Attention: Approximately The battery pack is almost discharged

Do not leave the computer in this 10 minutes and is about to enter the low-battery
condition for an extended period of (Blinking) remains for condition. Take either of the following
time. Data in memory will be lost. operation. actions immediately:
Connect the AC Adapter to the
Note: computer.
When you set the alarm with the Replace the battery pack with a fully
ThinkPad Features program, you charged spare
hear three beeps the moment this
indicator starts blinking. If corrective actions are not taken within
about 30 seconds, the computer will
enter suspend mode.
Note:
When this indicator is blinking, the Percentage of The battery pack is being charged (only
remaining battery indicator (%) does charging appears when the AC Adapter is
not always show the correct completed. connected).
percentage. In that case, repeat Percentage of The battery pack is being discharged (or
discharging and charging of the discharging is being used).
battery pack at least three times. completed.
Off (Not — The battery pack is not installed.
displayed) The computer is turned off.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 87

Using the Battery Status Indicator

Remaining Battery Indicator shows the amount of remaining battery

power by a percentage ( ), day ( ), hour ( ), or hours and
minutes ( ).

When using a secondary battery, the percentage indicates the total

remaining power for both battery packs, up to 100%.

Hints

To change the display of remaining power between hours and

percent, select Option... from the pull-down menu of the
Fuel-Gauge program; then click on your choice to display the
remaining power in either hours or percent.
Fuel
Restore
Move
Size
Minimize
Maximize
Option...
Close
Switch To...
About...

88 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Fuel-Gauge Program

Using the Fuel-Gauge Program

The Fuel-Gauge program displays the following battery-pack
O S / 2 WIN conditions on the screen:
Power mode
WIN WIN Battery status
Suspend or hibernation options
To install the ThinkPad Features Discharge option
program with the Fuel-gauge
program: The Fuel-Gauge program is available in OS/2 or Windows. When
Chapter 7. you click on the Fuel-Gauge icon in the ThinkPad Features window,
the Fuel-Gauge program appears. When you minimize the program
to an icon, every time you press the Fn+F2 key combination, the
Fuel-Gauge icon appears or disappears alternately from the screen.
Charge-In-Progress Suspend Button

Fuel

Hibernation Button

Percentage of
70 % Remaining Power
(1:30) Current Power
Mode (AC/High)
2 1

Gauge Discharge Duration of

Button Remaining Power

For more information on how to use Fuel-Gauge program, see the

online help. (Click the button at the left upper corner of the
Fuel-Gauge window.)

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 89

Preserving Battery-Pack Life

Discharging the Battery Pack for OS/2 and Windows

Note: When the battery pack needs to be discharged, the computer
Repeatedly charging a battery pack prompts you with a message. To discharge the battery, connect the
that has not been completely
AC Adapter to the computer and click on the discharge button ( )
discharged shortens the battery
operating time. To preserve battery
on the Fuel-Gauge program.
operating time, discharge the battery
pack completely; then recharge it.

The discharge-in-progress ( ) appears above the gauge symbol,

and the charge button ( ) appears in place of the Discharge
button.

You can use the computer while the battery pack is discharging;
however, do not enter suspend mode or turn off the computer until
the discharge is complete. Complete discharging of the battery pack
takes time.
When the battery pack is completely discharged, charging starts
automatically.

To cancel discharging, click on the charge icon ( ).

Preserving Battery-Pack Life

To preserve the life of the battery pack:

Attention: Do not charge the battery pack until all of its power is used.
Make sure the battery pack power is
completely used before you recharge Once you have started charging the battery pack, do not use it
it. Recharging a battery pack that is until it is fully charged.
not completely discharged can
Discharge the battery pack occasionally by using the
shorten battery life.
Fuel-Gauge program.
Turn off the computer whenever it is not in use.

90 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation

Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation

To save battery power:
Use Advanced Power Management (APM)
APM allows you to reduce power consumption when your
applications and devices are idle. Each operating system comes
with its own APM.
If you have purchased the computer with a preloaded operating
system, APM is already installed correctly.
Decrease the LCD brightness
Adjust the brightness control on the LCD to the lowest level
possible that allows you to comfortably view the screen. This is
an effective way of conserving battery power.
Use the Battery Power-Management function

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 91

Using Power Management

Using the Battery Power-Management Function

To install the ThinkPad Features Your computer has the following built-in battery power-saving
program: functions to save power when you use the battery pack or AC
Chapter 7. Adapter:
Operation modes. The operation modes control the processor
speed or set timers for saving power. For more information
about the operation modes, see the ThinkPad Features program
online help.
Power-saving modes. The power-saving modes stop all tasks
when the computer is not used for a specified time.
When resuming normal operation from one of the modes, use
the resume function to return to where you were when you
entered that mode. Because the operating system is already
loaded, the resume function is faster than turning the power on.

The following are the three power-saving modes:

Standby Mode You can enter standby mode for short idle times,
such as when you are having a short conversation.
Suspend Mode You can enter suspend mode for somewhat longer
times when you are away from your computer.
Hibernation Mode You can enter hibernation mode when you leave
your office for the day.

It takes more time to return to normal operation from suspend mode

than to return from standby mode, but the computer does not use as
much power.

92 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Power Management

The following figure shows the operations required when the

computer moves from a power-off condition to operation mode, and
vice versa.

Operation Mode

Press Press
Press Fn+F3 Any key
the
Fn key

Press Open
the the
Power LCD Press
Shutdown Fn+F4
Switch Standby Mode
Close
the
Press LCD
the
Power Press
Switch Fn+F12

Press
the
Power
Suspend Mode Switch

Automatically enters by the

timer or by a low battery
value, set in the ThinkPad
Features program.

Hibernation Mode

Power-off

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 93

Using Power Management

Standby Mode
In standby mode, the LCD (and external monitor output) turns off.
The computer immediately resumes normal operation when you
press any key or use any pointing device.

To enter standby mode, press Fn+F3. You can also set the standby
timer using the ThinkPad Features program. (To return to normal
operation, press any key.)

Suspend Modes
The computer provides the following two types of suspend modes for
you to save power:
Suspend mode
RediSafe suspend mode

To enter suspend mode, do one of the following:

Press Fn+F4.
Close the LCD of the computer.
Open the keyboard of the computer.
Set the suspend timer using the ThinkPad Features program.

When the computer is entering suspend mode, the suspend indicator

lamp ( ) blinks first, and then stays on (in green) with a beep.
The power indicator lamp ( ) turns off.

To return to normal operation, press the Fn key.

Suspend mode
In suspend mode, all tasks are stopped and stored in memory to
save power. When the computer resumes normal operation, the
tasks are automatically restored.

94 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Power Management

RediSafe suspend mode

In RediSafe suspend mode, all tasks are stopped, and memory
data and the status of the computer are stored on the hard disk
drive. This prevents accidental loss of data during suspend
mode. Resuming normal operation is faster in RediSafe
suspend mode than it is in hibernation mode; the computer
resumes normal operation when you press the Fn key in
RediSafe suspend mode.
If all battery power is used and the computer turns off during
RediSafe suspend mode, install a fully charged battery pack or
connect the AC Adapter; then press the power switch to resume
operation. All tasks are restored. Create the hibernation file
before using this mode. (See “Creating the Hibernation File” on
page 98.)

To enable RediSafe suspend mode, first, create the hibernation file;

then set RediSafe suspend in the ThinkPad Features program's
Battery ( ) menu. For more information, see the ThinkPad
Features program online help, or use PS2 commands.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 95

Using Power Management

Considerations for Suspend Mode

Consider the following before using suspend mode.

The computer can enter suspend mode when used with the
following operating systems:
– DOS Version 7.0
– OS/2 Warp Version 3
– Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 with DOS Version 7.0
– Microsoft Windows 95
– Microsoft Windows NT
Important
When you use Windows Version 3.11, ensure that Advanced
Power Management (APM) is installed according to the
instructions in “Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11” on
page 190.

Attached devices, such as a printer or serial device, stop running

when the computer enters suspend mode. When you resume
normal operation, the output might differ from what you expect,
because the device might be reset or lose its configuration
settings.
Sometimes you might want to use the computer with the LCD
closed, for example, when an external monitor and keyboard are
used. In such a case, turn on the computer with the LCD closed
or set the computer to not enter suspend mode when the LCD is
closed using the ThinkPad Features program.
When a power-on password is set and the computer resumes
normal operation by the ThinkPad Features timer or an incoming
call, only a blank screen is displayed. To display a power-on
password prompt, press any key or move your pointing device.
Standby mode: When the computer is powered with ac power and is using one
Page 94. of the following IBM PC Cards, it enters standby mode:
– IBM 3270 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Token-Ring 16/4 Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet
– IBM 5250 Emulation Credit Card Adapter

96 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Power Management

When other PC Cards are used and the computer enters suspend
mode, all application programs stop. Communication also stops for
communication PC Cards not listed above. For some PC Cards,
power to the PC Cards might also turn off.
When the computer is powered with battery power, the computer
turns power off to the PC Card, and communication stops for
communication PC Cards, so the duration of suspend mode is
longer.
If communication for a PC Card is not reestablished after
resuming normal operation, remove and then reinstall the PC
Card before restarting the system or application program. For
other kinds of PC Cards, if the PC Card or computer does not
operate, restart the application or computer.
Note: When the computer is attached to the Dock II and the
To disable the “Suspend/hibernate “Suspend/hibernate while docked” option is disabled, the
while docked” option, open the computer enters standby mode instead of suspend mode.
ThinkPad Features program and click

on the Docking Station ( )

option.

Note: When the computer is using one of the following IBM modem
You must set the Resume on cards and detects an incoming call while in suspend mode, the
incoming call option in the computer automatically resumes normal operation:
ThinkPad Features program so the
computer automatically resumes – IBM 28.8/14.4 Data/FAX Modem
normal operation. – IBM PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
For OS/2 or Windows: – IBM High Speed PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
– IBM Microelectronics 2.4/9.6 Data/FAX Modem
1. Click on the Battery ( ) – IBM Microelectronics 14.4/14.4 Data/FAX Modem
icon. – IBM Wireless Modem for ARDIS**
2. Click on the – IBM Wireless Modem for Mobitex**
Suspend/Resume option – IBM Wireless Modem for Cellular/CDPD
( ) icon; then select the
Resume on incoming call While a communication link is active, the computer does not enter
option. suspend mode.
For DOS: Enter PS2 RI E

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 97

Using Power Management

Hibernation Mode
Note: In hibernation mode, all tasks are stopped and memory data and the
With a base memory of 8MB, it takes current status of the computer are stored on the hard disk drive;
approximately 10 seconds to enter then power is turned off. No battery power is used. When power is
hibernation mode and 18 seconds to
turned on again, the computer automatically restores the tasks and
resume normal operation. (The time
resumes normal operation.
to enter or exit hibernation mode
depends on the computer memory
size.) To enter hibernation mode, press Fn+F12. To return to normal
operation, turn on the power switch.

Before you can use hibernation mode, you must first create a
hibernation file. See the next section.

Creating the Hibernation File

Attention: When installing an operating system or installing additional computer
The hibernation file must not be memory, you must create a hibernation file on the hard disk drive to
created in a compressed data area use the hibernation mode.
of the hard disk.
The size of the hibernation file will be greater than total memory.
Note:
For example, if base memory is 16MB and you have installed an
You can create a hibernation file on
the hard disk drive in the main hard optional 8MB memory module (DIMM), the hibernation file is 25MB:
disk drive bay. (16MB + 8MB) + 1MB = 25MB

See the ThinkPad Features program online help or PS2 command

help on how to create the hibernation file.

Considerations for Hibernation Mode

Consider the following before using hibernation mode:

Using a docking station or a particular PC Card can disable
hibernation mode.
Do not run any tasks while the hibernation file is being created.
The computer uses battery power to enter hibernation mode.
Therefore, it reserves some battery power when it is set to enter
hibernation mode when a low-battery condition occurs.

98 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Power Management

760
CD When you enter hibernation mode while playing music
CDs or multisession photo CDs, you will not return to where you
left off after resuming normal operation.
Note: When the computer is powered with battery power, the computer
If the communication links are still turns power off to the PC Card when entering hibernation mode.
not reestablished, remove and then When resuming normal operation, if the PC Card or computer
reinstall the PC Card before
does not operate, restart the application or computer.
restarting the system or application
program.

When the computer is powered with ac power and is using one

of the following IBM PC Cards, it does not enter hibernation
mode:
– IBM 28.8/14.4 Data/FAX Modem
– IBM PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
– IBM High Speed PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
– IBM 3270 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Token-Ring 16/4 Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet
– IBM 5250 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Microelectronics 2.4/9.6 Data/FAX Modem
– IBM Microelectronics 14.4/14.4 Data/FAX Modem
– IBM Wireless Modem for ARDIS
– IBM Wireless Modem for Mobitex
– IBM Wireless Modem for Cellular/CDPD
This prevents possible problems from occurring with
communication application programs after the computer returns
to normal operation.
When the computer enters hibernation mode while attached to
the docking station, it may not resume correctly.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 99

Using Power Management

100 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer

This chapter provides information about how to protect your

computer and its internal devices.

Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setting a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Entering a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Changing a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Removing a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Entering a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Changing a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Removing a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Entering a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Changing a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Removing a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Using Several Hard Disk Drives with the Supervisor
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Using the Personalization Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the Security Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the PC Card Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Removing the PC Card Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 101

Using a Power-On Password

Using Passwords
There are three types of passwords you can use to protect your
computer and the removable hard disk drive:
The power-on password protects your computer from being used
by unauthorized persons.
The hard disk password protects the data on your removable
hard disk drive from being accessed by unauthorized persons.
The supervisor password protects the system information in
Easy-Setup from being modified and your removable hard disk
drive from being used by unauthorized persons.

Hints
You can display your personal information, such as your name or
address, on the password prompt screen. For details, see page
116.

Power-On Password
If a power-on password is set, the password prompt ( ) appears
on the screen whenever you turn on the computer and reminds you
to enter the password.

Setting a Power-On Password

To set a power-on password:

Note: 1 Start Easy-Setup by pressing and holding F1 and then turning

If Initialize in the Config menu, on the computer.
Password, or Start up cannot be
selected when using Easy-Setup, a 2 Select the Password icon and then the Power-On icon ( ).
supervisor password is set. You
must enter the supervisor password
instead of the power-on password to
use all Easy-Setup functions.

102 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Power-On Password

Note: 3 Type your desired power-on password; then press Enter.

When you type a wrong key, use the
Backspace key to erase it and then You can use any combination of up to 7 characters. Use a
type the correct key. combination of any letters or numbers (A to Z, 0 to 9) in
uppercase (A) or lowercase (a). Uppercase and lowercase
letters (for example, A and a) are treated the same.
4 Type your power-on password again to verify it; then press
Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Power-On Password!

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot reset it. You
have to take the computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM
marketing representative to have the password canceled. Proof
of purchase is required, and an additional charge might be
required for the service.

Once you set the password, you cannot change or remove it in

Easy-Setup; you must change or remove a password at the
password prompt screen that appears when you turn on the
computer. See “Changing a Power-On Password” on page 104 or
“Removing a Power-On Password” on page 104.

Entering a Power-On Password

Notes: If a power-on password is set, the password prompt reminds you to
If the return to normal operation enter the password when:
is caused by a preset timer or an Turning on the computer.
incoming call through the
Returning to normal operation from suspend mode.
modem, the password prompt
does not appear. To display a
power-on password prompt, When the password prompt appears at the top left corner on the
press any key or move your screen, type your power-on password and press the Enter key.
pointing device. When the password is entered correctly, OK appears and the
To resume from standby mode computer starts normal operation.
when the computer is attached to
the Dock I or Dock II, you might
When you enter the password incorrectly, X appears. Enter the
need to enter the power-on correct password.
password. If you fail to enter the correct password after three tries, you
must turn the computer off, wait at least 5 seconds, and turn it
on to try again.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 103

Using a Power-On Password

Changing a Power-On Password

You must change your power-on password at the password prompt
screen that appears when you turn on the computer. To change a
power-on password, at the power-on password prompt ( ) screen,
do the following:
1 Type your current power-on password; then press the
Spacebar.
2 Type the new password; then press the Spacebar.
Use no more than 7 characters.
3 Type the new password again to verify it; then press Enter.

The new password will be available when you turn on the computer
the next time.

Do Not Forget Your Power-On Password!

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot reset it. You
have to take the computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM
marketing representative to have the password canceled. Proof
of purchase is required, and an additional charge might be
required for the service.

Removing a Power-On Password

You must remove your power-on password at the password prompt
that appears when you turn on the computer. To remove a power-on
password, at the power-on password prompt ( ), type your current
password, press the Spacebar, and then press Enter.

104 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Hard Disk Password

Hard Disk Password

The hard disk password helps you protect the information stored on
your removable hard disk drive. Even if your hard disk was
removed from the computer, the information stored in your hard disk
cannot be accessed without the hard disk password.

Note: When you turn on the computer, the hard disk password prompt
The hard disk password is stored on appears on the screen and reminds you to enter your password.
the hard disk drive when you set the
hard disk password, while the When a hard disk password is set, a preset timer or an incoming call
power-on password is stored in the
do not activate the resume function.
nonvolatile memory of the computer.

To use the resume function with a hard disk password, set the same
password for both the power-on password and the hard disk
password.

Note
Using a hard disk password with a power-on password:

You can use the hard disk password with the power-on password
at the same time. When you turn on the computer, the power-on
password prompt appears first and then the hard disk password
prompt appears on the screen. Enter the correct passwords.

When you set the same hard disk password as the power-on
password, only the power-on password prompt appears on the
screen. Enter the correct password. The hard disk password
screen does not appear.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 105

Using a Hard Disk Password

Setting a Hard Disk Password

Note: To set a hard disk password:

If Initialize in the Config menu,
Password, or Start up functions Note
cannot be selected when using
Before you set a hard disk password for the hard disk drive in
Easy-Setup, the supervisor password
is set. You must enter the the SelectaDock Docking System attached to the computer, you
supervisor password instead of the need to move that drive to the main hard disk drive bay of the
power-on password to use all computer from the SelectaDock Docking System. You cannot
Easy-Setup functions. set a password for a hard disk installed in the SelectaDock
Docking System.
SelectaDock Docking System:
Page 155.
1 Start Easy-Setup by pressing and holding F1 and then turning
on the computer.
Note: 2 Select the Password icon and then select HDD-1 ( 1
) or
HDD-1 represents a main hard disk 2
password and HDD-2 represents a HDD-2 ( ) according to the hard disk type you want to set.
secondary hard disk (installed in the
UltraBay) password.

Note: 3 Type your desired hard disk password; then press Enter.
When you type a wrong key, use the
Backspace key to erase it, and then You can use any combination of up to 7 characters. Use a
type the correct key. combination of any letters or numbers (A to Z, 0 to 9) in
uppercase (A) or lowercase (a). Uppercase and lowercase
letters (for example, A and a) are treated the same.
4 Type your hard disk password again to verify it; then press
Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Hard Disk Password!

Note the password and keep it in a safe place. If you forget your
hard disk password, there is no way to reset your password or
recover data from the hard disk. Neither an IBM authorized
reseller nor IBM marketing representative can make the hard disk
drive usable.

106 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Hard Disk Password

Entering a Hard Disk Password

If a hard disk password is set, the hard disk password prompt

appears when:
You turn on the computer.
When the computer returns to normal operation from suspend or
hibernation mode.

1
requests the hard disk password for the hard disk in the main
2
hard disk drive bay of the computer, requests the hard disk
3
password for the hard disk in the UltraBay of the computer, and
requests the hard disk password for the hard disk in the UltraBay of
the SelectaDock Docking System attached to the computer.
Note: When the password prompt appears at the top left corner on the
Do not press the Spacebar after you screen, type the hard disk password; then press Enter.
enter the password; this action
removes the password. When the password is entered correctly, OK appears and the
computer starts normal operation.
When you enter the password incorrectly, X appears. Enter the
correct password.
If you fail to enter the correct password after three tries, you
must turn the computer off, wait at least 5 seconds, and turn it
on to try again.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 107

Using a Hard Disk Password

Changing a Hard Disk Password

The procedure to change a hard disk password depends on whether
it is set to the same password as the power-on password.

When the hard disk password is set the same as the power-on
password:
1 Remove the passwords by following the steps in “Removing a
Power-On Password” on page 104.
This operation removes both the hard disk password and the
power-on password.
2 In Easy-Setup, set a new hard disk password. See the steps
on page 106.
3 If you need a power-on password, set it in Easy-Setup.
When the hard disk password and the power-on password are
different, or the power-on password has not been set:
1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then turn it
on.
2 If you have set a power-on password, type it; then press Enter.
3 When the hard disk password prompt ( ) appears, type your
current hard disk password; then press the Spacebar.
4 Type the new password; then press the Spacebar.
Use no more than 7 characters.
5 Type the new password again to verify it; then press Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Hard Disk Password!

Note the password and keep it in a safe place. If you forget your
hard disk password, there is no way to reset your password or
recover data in the hard disk drive. Neither an IBM authorized
reseller nor IBM marketing representative can make the hard disk
drive usable.

108 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Hard Disk Password

Removing a Hard Disk Password

The procedure to remove a hard disk password depends on whether
or not it is set to the same password as the power-on password.

When the hard disk password is set the same as the power-on
password:
1 Remove the password by following the steps in “Removing a
Power-On Password” on page 104.
This operation removes both the hard disk password and the
power-on password.
2 If you need a power-on password, reset it in Easy-Setup.

When the hard disk password and the power-on password are
different, or a power-on password has not been set:
1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then turn it
on.
2 If you have set the power-on password, type it; then press
Enter.

3 When the hard disk password prompt ( ) appears, type your

current password, press the Spacebar, and then press Enter.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 109

Using a Supervisor Password

Supervisor Password
The supervisor password helps you protect classified information. A
supervisor password:
Secures the system information stored in Easy-Setup.
Prohibits modification to the hardware.
Stops the computer after a POST error to restrict access to the
system information.
Note: Overrides the power-on password. (The supervisor password
The supervisor password has priority has priority over the power-on password.)
over the power-on password. You
can start the computer with the If a supervisor password is set, you are prompted with a power-on
supervisor password even if you do
icon ( ) to enter the supervisor password when entering the
not know the power-on password.
Easy-Setup program and when a POST error occurs. You can start
all normal operations for the computer except Easy-Setup without
the supervisor password.

Using Both Supervisor and Hard Disk Passwords

When a supervisor password is set, the same password is
automatically set for the hard disk password.

When you change or remove the supervisor password, the hard

disk password also is changed or removed.

Setting a Supervisor Password

If in addition to the hard disk in the main hard disk drive bay,
another hard disk is installed in the UltraBay of the computer, you
can set the same supervisor password for that hard disk as the
supervisor password for the main hard disk. However, if another
hard disk is installed in the UltraBay of the SelectaDock Docking
System, you cannot set the same supervisor password for it. (See
page 113.)
To set a supervisor password:
1 Start Easy-Setup by pressing and holding F1 and then turning
on the computer.

110 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Supervisor Password

2 Select the Password icon and select the Supervisor icon

( ).
3 Type your desired supervisor password; then press Enter.
You can use any combination of up to 7 characters. Use a
combination of any letters or numbers (A to Z, 0 to 9) in
uppercase (A) or lowercase (a). Uppercase and lowercase
letters (for example, A and a) are treated the same.
4 Type your supervisor password again to verify it; then press
Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Supervisor Password!

Note the password and keep it in a safe place. If you forget your
supervisor password, there is no way to reset your password
or recover data from the hard disk. You have to take the
computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing
representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of
purchase is required, and an additional charge might be required
for the service. Neither an IBM authorized reseller nor IBM
marketing representative can make the hard disk drive usable.

If you are using more than one hard disk drive, see page 114.

Entering a Supervisor Password

To enter your supervisor password, at the power-on password
prompt, type your supervisor password; then press Enter.
When the password is entered correctly, OK appears.
When you enter the password incorrectly, X appears. Enter the
correct password.
If you fail to enter the correct password after three tries, you
must turn the computer off, wait at least 5 seconds, and turn it
on to try again.

Changing a Supervisor Password

To change your supervisor password:

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 111

Using a Supervisor Password

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then turn it
on.
2 Start Easy-Setup by pressing and holding F1 and then turning
on the computer.
3 Type your current supervisor password at the power-on prompt
( ); then press Enter.
4 Select the Password icon from the Easy-Setup menu.
5 Select the Supervisor icon; then type your current supervisor
password and press the Spacebar.
A window appears so you can enter a new password.
6 Type the new password; then press Enter.
7 Type the new password again for verification; then press Enter.
Do Not Forget Your Supervisor Password!
Note the password and keep it in a safe place. If you forget your
supervisor password, you have to take the computer to an IBM
authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative to have the
system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and an
additional charge might be required for the service.

If you forget your supervisor password, there is no way to reset

your password or recover data from the hard disk. Neither
an IBM authorized reseller nor IBM marketing representative can
make the hard disk drive usable.

If you are using more than one hard disk drive, see page 115.

112 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Supervisor Password

Removing a Supervisor Password

To remove the supervisor password:

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then turn it
on.
2 Start Easy-Setup by pressing and holding F1 and then turning
on the computer.
3 When the power-on prompt ( ) appears, type your current
supervisor password; then press Enter.
4 Select the Password icon from the Easy-Setup menu.
5 Select the Supervisor icon; then type your current password
and press the Spacebar.
6 Press Enter at the blank box.
7 Press Enter again at the verification screen.

When the supervisor password is removed, the lock in the

Supervisor icon is unlocked ( ) and you can select the HDD
icons.

If you are using more than one hard disk drive, see page 115.

Using Several Hard Disk Drives with the Supervisor Password

Because the supervisor password automatically sets a hard disk
password, you must set a supervisor password for each hard disk
drive you are using in the main hard disk drive bay.

If you install a hard disk in the UltraBay of the computer or the

SelectaDock Docking System, you must set the same supervisor
password for those hard disk drives. You can set the same
supervisor password for the hard disk in the main hard disk as the
one in the UltraBay of the computer. But you need to move the hard
disk in the SelectaDock Docking System to the main hard disk drive
bay to set a supervisor password for that hard disk.

To change or remove a supervisor password when you are using

several hard disk drives, you must change or remove the hard disk
password for each hard disk drive.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 113

Using a Supervisor Password

Setting a Supervisor Password when Using Several Hard Disk

Drives:

To set a supervisor password when using more than one hard disk
drive on your computer:
To set a supervisor password: 1 Set a supervisor password on your computer.
Page 110.
To install the hard disk drive: 2 Install the hard disk drive that you want to set the supervisor
Page 132. password for, in the main hard disk drive bay (to the right of
the battery pack).
3 Turn on the computer. A 158 error appears.
4 Press Enter.
5 Type your supervisor password at the power-on password
prompt.
If an error code 158 appears, press Enter to go to the
Easy-Setup password screen.
6 Select the Supervisor icon; then press Enter.
The supervisor password sets the hard disk password on the
hard disk drive.
7 Turn off the computer. Repeat steps 2 through 7 to set the
supervisor password for each hard disk drive.

114 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using a Supervisor Password

Changing or Removing the Supervisor Password when Using

Several Hard Disk Drives:

To change or remove the supervisor password when using more

than one hard disk drive on your computer:
To change the supervisor password: 1 Change or remove your supervisor password on your
Page 111. computer.

To remove the supervisor password: 2 In the main hard disk drive bay, install the hard disk drive that
Page 113.
has the old supervisor password set.
3 Turn on the computer. The hard disk password prompt
To install the hard disk password: appears.
Page 132.
4 Do one of the following:
If you removed the supervisor password in step 1, type the
old supervisor password; then press the Spacebar.
If you changed the supervisor password in step 1, change
the old password on the hard disk drive to the new
supervisor password:
a) Type your old password and press the Spacebar.
b) Type your new password and press the Spacebar.
c) Type your new password again.
5 Press Enter.
6 Turn off the computer. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to change or
remove the supervisor password for each hard disk drive.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 115

Using the Personalization Editor

Using the Personalization Editor

You can display personal information, such as your name or
O S / 2 WIN address, every time the computer is turned on and a power-on or
hard disk password is set. This can help you when you misplace
WIN WIN your computer. Because the password is set, your data is secured
and cannot be accessed, but your personal information is displayed
and identifies the owner of the computer.
To set the password:
Page 102. You can display your favorite background bitmap image 2 around
your personal data 1 .

1
d d d d
in kPa in kPa in kPa in kPa
Th Th Th Th

Pad kPa
d
ink
John Smith

Th
IBM Corporation in
123-456-789
1234-56 Big Road, New York
Th
d If you find this computer,
Pad
in kPa please contact the above address.
k
Th Thin 2

kPa
d
kPa
d
kPa
d Pad
in in in ink
Th Th Th Th

To use the personalization editor, start the Personalization icon in

the ThinkPad Features utility and see the online help.

For OS/2 Users

To use the personalization editor in OS/2 Warp, you need to
install the WIN-OS/2 environment in the computer.

116 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Locks

Using Locks
Note: You can protect your computer and its internal devices with locks.
You are responsible for evaluating,
selecting, and implementing the To protect the internal devices under the keyboard and prevent
locking devices and security features. the removal of your computer, you can purchase a Kensington
IBM makes no comments, MicroSaver Security System lock (hereafter called a Kensington
judgments, or warranties about the lock) or a compatible lock.
function, quality or performance of
locking devices and security features. To protect PC Cards, you can use a PC Card lock.

Using the Security Lock

To prevent your computer and its internal devices from being
removed without permission, purchase a Kensington lock or a
compatible lock and do the following:
1 Lock the latch 1 on the right side of the computer to open the
keyhole 2 .

1 2

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 117

Using Locks

Note: 2 Attach a Kensington lock or a compatible lock to the keyhole

This also prevents the removal of: on the side of the computer; then secure the chain on the lock
to a secure stationary object.
Internal devices under the
keyboard
Memory modules (DIMMs) in the
memory slot on the bottom of the
computer.

Using the PC Card Lock

To prevent PC Cards from being removed from the PC Card slots:

Attention: 1 Open the keyboard and remove the hard disk drive; then
Make sure the security latch at the position the PC Card lock as shown.
right side of the computer is
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.)
Attention:
The hard disk drive is a very delicate
device that needs careful handling.
If it falls onto a hard surface, severe
damage can occur.

118 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using Locks

2 Fit the upper portion of the PC Card lock into the two notches
1 as shown.
1

3 Insert the lower portion of the PC Card lock into the openings
2 on the bottom edge of the computer.

4 Slide the PC Card lock to the right.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 119

Using Locks

5 Insert the spacer 3 from the inner side of the computer as

shown to stop the PC Card lock from sliding.
3

To use the security keyhole: 6 Replace the hard disk drive and lock the keyboard using the
Page 117. security keyhole.

Removing the PC Card Lock

To remove the PC Card lock:

Attention: 1 Open the keyboard and remove the hard disk drive.
Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is 2 Remove the spacer from the computer.
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.)
3 Slide the PC Card lock toward the front of the computer.
Attention:
The hard disk drive is a very delicate 4 Remove the PC Card lock first from the lower portion and then
device that needs careful handling. from the upper portion.
If it falls onto a hard surface, severe
damage can occur. Be sure to save the PC Card lock for future use.

120 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options

This chapter provides information about how to install or remove

external or internal devices and IBM options.

Installing and Removing PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Inserting the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Installing a Memory Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Installing and Removing the DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Replacing the Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Installing the CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Installing the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay . . . . . . . 138
Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay . . . . . 142
Installing an Option in the UltraBay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse . . . . . . . 152
Using the Serial Mouse and Other Pointing Devices . . . . . 153
Attaching an External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Using the Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Using the SelectaDock Docking System . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Using the Dock I or Dock II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Using the SCSI Device with the Dock I . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Using the Security Plate for the Docking Station . . . . . . . 161

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 121

Installing and Removing PC Cards

Installing and Removing PC Cards

This section explains how to install and remove a PC Card. For
information about operating the computer with PC Cards, refer to
“Using PC Cards” on page 44.

Note: The computer has two PC Card slots (upper slot 1 and lower slot
When installing an operating system, 2 ), and you can install two Type I or Type II PC Cards (one in
install the PCMCIA device driver that each slot), or a single Type III PC Card (in the lower slot).
is on the PC Card Director Diskette
before using PC Cards.

To install the PCMCIA device driver:

Chapter 7.

Inserting the PC Card

To insert the PC Card to the computer:

1 Find the notched edge 1 of the PC Card as shown.

122 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing and Removing PC Cards

2 Insert the PC Card into an appropriate slot according to your

PC Card type. Slot covers open to the inside when you insert
the PC Card.
If you are using a Type I or Type II PC Card, insert it into
either the upper slot 1 or the lower slot 2 .
If you are using a Type III PC Card, insert the card into the
lower slot 2 .

3 Press the PC Card firmly into the connector until the eject
button 1 pops out. Then, pull the eject button out slightly and
fold it to the left.

Refer to the following sections:

To use PC Cards, see “Using PC Cards” on page 44.
To use PC Cards with power-saving functions, see:
– “Considerations for Suspend Mode” on page 96.
– “Considerations for Hibernation Mode” on page 98.
To secure your PC Card with a lock, see “Using the PC Card
Lock” on page 118.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 123

Installing and Removing PC Cards

Removing the PC Card

Attention: Attention
Make sure the PC Card lock is
Before removing such storage PC Cards as the hard disk PC
removed.
Card, flash memory PC Card, or SRAM PC Card from the PC
To remove PC Card lock: Card slot, turn off the computer. Otherwise, data in the PC
Card may be corrupted or lost.
Page 120.
However, there is a safe way to remove the storage PC Card
without turning off the computer. See page 48.

Raise the PC Card eject button 1 for the PC Card you want to
remove. Then press the PC Card eject button and remove the PC
Card.

124 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Memory Option

Installing a Memory Option

Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs
run faster. You can increase the amount of memory in your
computer by installing a memory option, called a dual inline memory
module, or DIMM, to increase your computer's memory.

Important
Changing memory while your computer is in suspend mode or
hibernation mode may cause permanent damage to the
equipment.

Installing and Removing the DIMM

1 Touch any metal object with your hand.

2 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter and all
cables from the computer.
Attention: 3 If you are using any locking device with a security keyhole,
Make sure that any locking device is remove it.
unlocked.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 125

Installing a Memory Option

4 Press and slide the security latch 1 on the right side of the
computer to unlock the security lock.
Some pressure might be needed to slide the latch.

5 Turn over the computer; then slide the memory slot cover 1
and remove it.

1
2
1

Attention: 6 Remove the DIMM adapter by lifting up the edge 1 from the
To avoid damaging the DIMM, do not computer, and place it on a flat surface.
touch its contact edge.

7 Which are you going to do?

Install a DIMM Go to the next step.
Remove a DIMM Go to step 10 on page 128.

126 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Memory Option

Attention: 8 Insert the DIMM (available as an option) into either of the

When attaching the DIMM to the sockets on the DIMM adapter.
DIMM adapter, place the DIMM
adapter on a flat surface. Otherwise, a) Find the notch 1 on the side of the DIMM.
the DIMM adapter may be damaged.
b) With the notched end of the DIMM toward the right side of
the socket 2 , insert the DIMM, at an angle of
approximately 20°, into the socket; then press it firmly.
c) Pivot the DIMM until it snaps into place.
If you have another DIMM to install, insert it into the other
socket in the same way.

2
1
Side View

2 1

20

9 Go to step 11 on page 128.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 127

Installing a Memory Option

Attention: 10 Press out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the
To avoid damaging the DIMM, do not same time and remove the DIMM.
touch its contact edge.

Be sure to save the DIMM for future use.

11 Attach the DIMM adapter to the computer.
a) Turn over the DIMM adapter.
b) Place it into the memory slot and then align the connectors
of the DIMM adapter 1 and the memory slot 2 .

128 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Memory Option

c) Press on the shaded area 1 until the DIMM adapter

snaps into the memory slot connector.
Press on three points (both sides and center) of the shaded
area.

d) Make sure the DIMM adapter is firmly connected.

12 Align the matching ( ) marks on the memory slot cover and
the bottom of the computer; then slide in the memory slot
cover.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 129

Installing a Memory Option

13 To confirm that the DIMM adapter is correctly attached to the

computer, do the following:
a) Calculate your total memory size by adding the DIMM
memory size to the base memory size (for example,
7808KB).
For example, if you installed two 16MB DIMMs in addition
to 7808KB base memory, the total memory size can be
calculated as follows:
16(MB) x 2 x 1 24(KB) + 78 8(KB) = 4 576(KB)
Note: b) Start Easy-Setup and confirm the memory size count at the
To start Easy-Setup, press and hold upper left corner of the screen as shown:
F1; then turn on the computer.

4 576 KB OK

If a 2 1 error code appears under the memory count, turn

off the computer and go to page 125 to reinstall the DIMM.

4 576 KB OK

2 1

c) Is the total memory size the same as the value you

calculated in step 13a?
Yes Go to the next step.
No Turn off the computer and go to page 125 to reinstall
the DIMM.
Note: d) Select Test from the main menu of Easy-Setup; then select
It may take some time to complete Memory.
the memory test.
The memory test starts.
e) Does an OK message now appear under the Memory icon?
Yes You have installed the DIMM and DIMM adapter
correctly. Exit Easy-Setup and go to next step.
No You need to reinstall the DIMM adapter. Go to page
125 and reinstall the DIMM adapter.

130 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Memory Option

14 Slide the latch 1 to lock the memory slot cover.

To prevent the installed DIMMs from being removed from the

computer, attach a lock to the security keyhole. See page 117.
15 Close the keyboard and reconnect all cables.
Note
If you changed the memory installed in the computer, create a
new hibernation file to use hibernation mode. See “Creating the
Hibernation File” on page 98.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 131

Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

The capacity of the hard disk can be increased by replacing the
original hard disk drive with an optional one. This option can be
purchased through your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter and all
cables from the computer.
Attention: 2 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.)
Attention:
The hard disk drive is a very delicate
device that needs careful handling.
If it falls onto a hard surface, severe
damage can occur.

3 Lift the hard disk drive handle by pulling the plastic tape 1 .

132 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

4 Remove the hard disk drive.

Be careful to hold the drive as it comes out of the bay. Gently
place it on a flat surface. After removing the drive, store it in
the carrying case that contained the replacement drive.

5 Insert the replacement drive. Press on the shaded area 1 as

shown until the drive snaps into the connector and then replace
the hard disk drive handle.

6 Close the keyboard, and connect the AC Adapter to the

computer; then turn on the computer.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 133

Installing the CD-ROM Drive

Installing the CD-ROM Drive

760 To remove the diskette drive from the UltraBay and install the
CD
CD-ROM drive:

Note: 1 Make sure that no diskette is in the diskette drive.

If you are using DOS or Windows,
the diskette drive can be removed
without turning off the computer.
2 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
Refer to the documents supplied with 3 Lift the handle on the diskette drive with the plastic tape, and
your operating systems.
remove the diskette drive.

Attention:
Make sure that any locking device is
unlocked.

The CD-ROM and diskette drives are

very delicate devices that need
careful handling. Do not press on,
drop, or apply any shock to the
drives when they are removed from
the computer. 4 Remove the front bezel from the inside of the computer.
a) Slide the lever 1 on the bezel to the right as shown.
b) Pull the upper portion of the bezel the remove the bezel.

134 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing the CD-ROM Drive

5 Install the CD-ROM drive. Press area 1 until the drive snaps
into the connector. Close the keyboard; then reconnect all
cables.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 135

Installing the Diskette Drive

Installing the Diskette Drive

760 The CD-ROM drive can be removed and replaced with the internal
CD
diskette drive supplied with the computer. When using DOS or
Windows, you can replace the drives without turning off the
computer.

To install the diskette drive:

Note: 1 Close any CD-ROM applications and make sure the CD-ROM
If you are using DOS or Windows, tray is closed.
the CD-ROM drive can be removed
without turning off the computer. 2 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
Refer to the documents supplied with
your operating systems. 3 Lift the handle on the CD-ROM drive with the plastic tape, and
remove the CD-ROM drive.
Attention:
Make sure that any locking device is
unlocked.

The CD-ROM and diskette drives are

very delicate devices that need
careful handling. Do not press on,
drop, or apply any shock to the
drives when they are removed from
the computer.

136 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing the Diskette Drive

4 Install the diskette drive bezel on the inside of the computer.

a) Fit notch 1 on the lower portion of the bezel into the
catch at the bottom of the drive bezel slot 2 .
b) Push the upper portion of the bezel into the slot until it
snaps into place.
c) Slide the lever 3 on the bezel to the left as shown.
The following figure shows the installation as seen from the
inside of the computer.
2
3

Attention: 5 Install the diskette drive. Press area 1 until the drive snaps
The diskette drive is a very delicate into the connector.
device. Do not press on the middle
part of the drive.
2

6 Close the keyboard; then reconnect all cables.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 137

Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

You can extend battery operation time by using two battery packs
installed in the computer at the same time. A secondary battery
pack is available as an option. Before installing a secondary battery
pack, remove the CD-ROM drive or diskette drive from the UltraBay.
Attention: 1 Stop any running applications; then make sure the CD-ROM
To prevent damage to the CD-ROM tray is closed or any diskette is removed from the diskette
drive or diskette drive, make sure the
drive.
AC Adapter is disconnected from the
computer. 2 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter and all
cables from the computer.
The CD-ROM drive and diskette
drive are very delicate devices that
need careful handling. Do not press
on, drop, or apply any shock to the
CD-ROM drive or diskette drive while
it is removed from the computer.
Attention: 3 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is 4 Lift the drive handle with the plastic tape, and remove the
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.) CD-ROM drive or diskette drive.

138 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

5 Pinch together both holes and remove the spacer by lifting it up

slightly.

6 Place the spacer to cover the CD-ROM drive or diskette drive

connector.
a) Make sure the projected end 1 fits into the opening 2 .

b) Place the spacer onto the connector and then open the
battery connector cover.

7 Which drive are you removing?

CD-ROM drive Go to step 8 on page 140.
Diskette drive Go to step 10 on page 140.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 139

Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

760
8 CD Install the blank front bezel on the inside of the computer.
a) Fit notch 1 on the lower portion of the bezel into the
catch at the bottom of the drive bezel slot 2 .
b) Push the upper portion of the bezel into the slot until it
snaps into place.
c) Slide the lever 3 on the bezel to the left as shown.
The following figure shows the installation as seen from the
inside of the computer.
2
3

9 Go to step 12 on page 141.

Note: 760
Keep the diskette drive bezel for
10 Slide the diskette drive bezel slightly to the left and
FDD

future use. remove it by pulling toward the front.

140 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

11 Place the blank bezel at position 1 as shown and slide it to

the right.

12 Insert the secondary battery pack into the UltraBay.

13 Close the keyboard and reconnect all cables.

When Replacing the CD-ROM Drive or Diskette Drive

Before you replace the CD-ROM drive or diskette drive in the
UltraBay:
1. Cover the battery connector with its cover.
2. Move the spacer back to its original position (shown in step 5
on page 139).

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 141

Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

You can use two hard disk drives at the same time by installing a
secondary hard disk in the UltraBay. To use the secondary hard
disk, you need to purchase another hard disk drive and a hard disk
holder. Before installing the secondary hard disk, remove the
CD-ROM drive or diskette drive.

Attention: 1 Attach the secondary hard disk drive to the hard disk holder.
The hard disk drive is a very delicate
device that needs careful handling.
Do not press on, drop, or apply any a) Insert the hard disk drive in the hard disk holder so that the
shock to the hard disk drive. slot 1 on the hard disk drive fits into the projection on the
hard disk drive.
b) Press the shaded area 2 until the hard disk firmly snaps
into the hard disk holder; then replace the hard disk drive
handle 3 .

3
1

2 Close any running applications on the computer; then make

sure the CD-ROM tray is closed or no diskette is in the diskette
drive.

142 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

Attention: 3 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter and all
To prevent damage to the CD-ROM cables from the computer.
drive or diskette drive, make sure the
AC Adapter is disconnected from the
computer.
The CD-ROM drive and diskette
drive are very delicate devices that
need careful handling. Do not press
on, drop, or apply any shock to the
CD-ROM drive or diskette drive while
it is removed from the computer.
Attention: 4 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is 5 Remove the battery pack.
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.)

2
1

6 Lift the drive handle with the plastic tape, and remove the
CD-ROM drive or diskette drive.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 143

Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

7 Which drive are you removing?

CD-ROM drive Go to next step.
Diskette drive Go to step 9 on page 145.
760
8 CD Install the diskette drive bezel from the inside of the
computer.
a) Fit notch 1 on the lower portion of the bezel into the
catch at the bottom of the drive bezel slot 2 .
b) Push the upper portion of the bezel into the slot until it
snaps into place.
c) Slide the lever 3 on the bezel to the left as shown.
The following figure shows the installation as seen from the
inside of the computer.
2
3

144 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

Note: 9 Place the hard disk holder (with the hard disk drive attached)
You can see the lamp on the into the UltraBay. Press on the shaded area 1 as shown
secondary hard disk, which turns on until the drive snaps into the connector; then replace the drive
when data in the secondary hard
handle 2 .
disk drive is accessed, through the
diskette drive bezel.
2
2

10 Replace the battery pack.

11 Close the keyboard; then reconnect all cables.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 145

Installing an Option in the UltraBay

Installing an Option in the UltraBay

Note: The CD-ROM drive or diskette drive and its bezel (on the front of the
To install the diskette drive into the computer) can be removed to install different options in the UltraBay.
UltraBay, see page 136. Some options may require you to remove the option cover from the
left side of the computer.
Attention: 1 Close any running applications; then make sure the CD-ROM
To prevent damage to the CD-ROM tray is closed or any diskette is removed from the diskette
drive or diskette drive, make sure the
drive.
AC Adapter is disconnected from the
computer. 2 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter and all
cables from the computer.
The CD-ROM drive and diskette
drive are very delicate devices that
need careful handling. Do not press
on, drop, or apply any shock to the
CD-ROM drive or diskette drive while
it is removed from the computer.
Attention: 3 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is 4 Remove the battery pack.
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.)

2
1

146 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing an Option in the UltraBay

5 Lift the drive handle with the plastic tape, and remove the
CD-ROM drive or diskette drive.

6 If the option you are installing has its own option cover to be
attached at the left side of the computer, do the following:
a) Push the current option cover 1 from the inside of the
computer to remove it.

b) Attach the new option cover that came with your option to
the side of the computer.

7 Which drive are you removing?

CD-ROM drive Go to next step.
Diskette drive Go to step 10 on page 148.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 147

Installing an Option in the UltraBay

To install a blank front bezel: 8 If the option you are installing has a front bezel, attach the new
Page 136. front bezel that came with your option (refer to the manual that
came with your option).
9 Go to step 11 on page 148.
Note: 10 If the option you are installing has a front bezel, do the
Keep the diskette drive bezel for following:
future use.
a) Slide the diskette drive bezel slightly to the left and remove
it by pulling toward the front.

b) Place the new front bezel that came with your option at
position 1 as shown and slide it to the right.

11 Refer to the manual that came with the option to install your
option in the UltraBay.
12 Replace the battery pack.
13 Close the keyboard and reconnect all cables.

148 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

Note: If the telephone connector on the left side of your computer is one
In some countries, the Mwave with a square receptacle, the computer can be used for telephony or
telephony functions are only modem/fax functions without any changes. However, if a blank port
available when the DAA/Telephony
cover and port cover are attached you need to install the
Kit option is installed.
DAA/Telephony Kit option to use the Mwave telephony functions.
The DAA/Telephony Kit may only be used in the countries in which it
has been approved by the country's telephone authorities.
Attempting to use the kit in other countries may be contrary to the
laws of those countries. If you are traveling to another country
where the DAA/Telephony Kit is not approved by the local
telecommunications authorities, you may contact IBM or an IBM
distributor in that country to check if you can purchase a modem of
the ThinkPad DAA/Telephony Kit that is approved for that country.

CAUTION:
Your computer can use only a public-switched telephone
network (PSTN). Do not use a PBX (private branch exchange)
or other digital telephone extension lines. Use of phone lines
other than PSTN can damage your modem. If you are not sure
which kind of phone line you are using, contact your telephone
company. Many hotels or office buildings use digital telephone
extension lines, so check before connecting the telephone
cable in such places.
To attach the DAA/Telephony Kit:
Attention: 1 Turn off the computer and disconnect the power cable.
Make sure the security latch at the
right side of the computer is 2 Open the keyboard and remove the battery pack.
unlocked. (See step 2 on page 7.)

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 149

Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

3 Remove the metal port cover lock 1 , and remove the blank
port cover 2 from the lower portion.

Attention: 4 Install the plug with the round receptacle that came with your
Make sure that any locking device is option kit. Firmly press it into the connector.
unlocked.

5 On the left side of the computer, install the port cover 1 with
the round opening that came with your option kit, and insert the
metal port cover lock 2 .

6 Close the keyboard.

150 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

7 Connect the cables:

DANGER

To avoid shock hazard, do not connect the

telephone cable to or disconnect it from the
computer during electrical storms.

Note: a) Connect one end of the DAA interface cable 1 to the

Both ends of the DAA interface cable connector plug with the round receptacle.
are identical.
b) Connect the other end of the DAA interface cable 2 to
the round receptacle on the DAA.
c) Connect the ferrite-core end connector 3 of the telephone
cable to the square receptacle on the DAA.
d) Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the
telephone outlet 4 on the wall.

DAA

Telephone
Outlet

Core
After you have finished attaching the modem/fax port, install the
necessary software by referring to the manual that came with the
option kit.

Refer to “Using the Telephony Function” on page 56 for information

about how to use the Mwave telephony features.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 151

Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse

Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse

Attention: An external numeric keypad or a mouse can be attached directly to
When you connect a mouse other the external-input-device connector. You can use both the IBM PS/2
than an IBM PS/2 Miniature Mouse, Miniature Mouse and TrackPoint III at the same time.
turn off the computer.

Note: If you want to use the external numeric keypad and mouse at the
You can remove the keypad cover same time, first connect the keypad cable to the computer; then
1 and use it as a stand for the connect the mouse cable 1 to the connector at the rear of the
keypad.
keypad.

152 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse

Using the Serial Mouse and Other Pointing Devices

Note: If you use a serial mouse connected to the serial port or a pointing
The appropriate software must have device that is not compatible with the PS/2 Mouse, you might need
already been installed. to disable the TrackPoint III before you can use it.
To disable the TrackPoint III:
OS/2 WIN WIN
1 Start the ThinkPad Features program.

2 Click on the Keyboard/Pointing-Device ( ) icon.

3 Click on Disable for the TrackPoint.
These changes become effective when computer power is
turned off and then on again.

Using the IBM ThinkPad Space Saver Keyboard

When using the IBM ThinkPad Space Saver Keyboard, do not
install the device driver supplied with the Space Saver Keyboard.
When the Space Saver Keyboard is used, the device driver on
the computer's Utility Diskette automatically enables or disables
the TrackPoint III of the computer when power is turned on.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 153

Attaching an External Keyboard

Attaching an External Keyboard

When you attach the external keyboard, turn off the computer, and
attach the keyboard/mouse connector 1 to your computer ( 1 ) and
then the external keyboard ( 2 ).

2
1

When the external keyboard is attached, the following keys are not
available:
Numeric keypad on the system keyboard
External numeric keypad
You should use the numeric keypad on the external keyboard.

154 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Docking Station

Using the Docking Station

To expand your computer resources, you can use a docking station
such as the SelectaDock Docking System (PCI bus), Dock I (ISA
bus), or Dock II (ISA bus).

Using the SelectaDock Docking System

Attention: The following shows how the computer is docked. To dock the
When setting up your docking computer to the SelectaDock Docking System, see the User's Guide,
station, avoid any hardware conflicts. which came with the SelectaDock Docking System.

To avoid hardware conflicts:

Page 267.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 155

Using the Docking Station

When you dock the computer to the SelectaDock Docking System

with a new hardware or software setting, do the following:
Note: 1 Install all the new devices in the SelectaDock Docking System.
For example, “device” means:
2 Do the following according to your device newly installed:
PC Card or CardBus PC Card
PCI or ISA adapter card When you install a PCI adapter card or a SCSI device, at
Device in the UltraBay such as least one IRQ level (default setting is IRQ11) is assigned
CD-ROM drive, IDE hard disk for that PCI device or SCSI device. Make sure that an IRQ
drive, or diskette drive
level is selected for the PCI device as follows:
SCSI device
Others a) Start the ThinkPad Features program and click on the
Docking Station ( ) icon.
b) Click on the Advanced button and click on the PCI
device setup icon.
c) Make sure an IRQ level is selected.
Note: When you install an ISA adapter card, you need to ensure
To set a jumper or the DIP switches that the resource setting (such as IRQ or DMA) for the new
on the adapter card, see the manual ISA adapter card does not conflict with settings for the
that came with the adapter card.
other devices in the computer. Set a jumper or the DIP
switches on the adapter card, or change the system
resource setting with the ThinkPad Features program. See
Example 2 on page 268.

Note: After that, specify the information about that card by using
To input the resource setting for the the ThinkPad Features program. By this action, you might
adapter card: be able to avoid future resource conflict problems.
1. Start the ThinkPad Features When you install an IDE device (hard disk drive or
program. CD-ROM drive):
2. Click on the Docking Station
– Check that no resource conflict occurs between the
( ) icon and click on new IDE device and the other devices in the computer
Advanced. by using the ThinkPad Features program.
3. Click on PCI device setup. – Start the ThinkPad Features program and click on the
Docking Station ( ) icon; then add a check mark
for Enable secondary IDE device.

156 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Docking Station

3 Dock your computer to the SelectaDock Docking System; then

turn on the computer.
The computer automatically starts Easy-Setup and runs an
autoconfiguration program to create a new configuration.
After that, the computer restarts, and the new devices in the
SelectaDock Docking System are available.
Note: Once a configuration is created and if hot or warm docking or
A device's functional capability in its undocking is enabled by the ThinkPad Features program, the
hot/warm docking depends on computer can be docked to the SelectaDock Docking System even
operating system and the device
during operation mode or suspend mode. To use the computer with
driver. For more information, refer to
a new setting including the SelectaDock Docking System, you
manuals that came with your
operating system and the devices. should create a new configuration by starting the computer with the
SelectaDock Docking System docked.

If some devices in the SelectaDock Docking System cannot be

enabled due to resource shortage or conflict, see Appendix A and
check the system resources that are already occupied by other
built-in devices.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 157

Using the Docking Station

Using the Dock I or Dock II

Attention: The following illustration shows the computer docked to the Dock II:
When setting up your docking
station, avoid any hardware conflicts.

To avoid hardware conflicts:

Page 267.

Attention:
Do not use the Utility Diskettes that
came with the IBM Dock II.

To dock the computer to the Dock I or Dock II, see the User's
Guide, which came with the Dock I or Dock II.

Hints
When an IBM Dock I is docked to the computer, you can adjust
the sound volume by using the following key combinations:
When you press and hold Fn and then press PgUp ( ),
the sound volume increases.
When you press and hold Fn and then press PgDn ( ),
the sound volume decreases.

When you dock the computer to the Dock I or Dock II with a new
hardware or software setting, do the following:

158 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Docking Station

Note: When you install an ISA adapter card, you need to ensure that
To set a jumper or the DIP switches the resource setting (such as IRQ or DMA) for the new ISA
on the adapter card, see the manual adapter card does not conflict with settings for the other devices
that came with the adapter card. in the computer. Set a jumper or the DIP switches on the
adapter card, or change the system resource setting of the
computer with the ThinkPad Features program. See Example 2
on page 268.

Note: Then, specify the information about that card with the ThinkPad
To input the resource setting for the Features program. By this action, you might be able to avoid
adapter card: future resource conflict problems.
1. Start the ThinkPad Features When you install an IDE device such as CD-ROM drive or hard
program. disk drive in the Dock I or Dock II:
2. Click on the Docking Station 1. Install the ThinkPad IDE Adapter Kit for Dock I and Dock II
( ) icon and click on (available as an option) in your computer before docking the
Advanced. the computer to the SelectaDock Docking System.
3. Click on ISA device setup. 2. Check that no resource conflict occurs between the new IDE
device and the other devices in the computer by using the
ThinkPad Features program.
3. Enable the IDE device as follows:
a) Start the ThinkPad Features program and click on the
Docking Station ( ) icon.
b) Add a check mark for Enable secondary IDE device.
When you install a Plug and Play ISA adapter card in the Dock I
or Dock II, do the following:
1. Install the adapter card in the Dock I or Dock II.
2. Dock the computer to the Dock I or Dock II and turn on the
computer.
The card is ready to use.
If a utility program came with the adapter card, you might
need to install it in the computer. See the manual that came
with the adapter card.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 159

When Using the SCSI Device with the Dock I

Using the SCSI Device with the Dock I

When you dock the computer to the Dock I with the SCSI device
DOS WIN installed, and use DOS or Windows, do the following:

Note: 1 Check the interrupt level (IRQ) for the SCSI controller in the
Refer to the Dock I User's Guide for Dock I by using the the Dock I DIP switches.
information on the DIP switches.

2 Start the ThinkPad Features program.

3 Click on the Docking Station ( ) icon and click on

Advanced.
4 Click on ISA device setup.
5 Assign the same interrupt level as the one you checked in the
step 1 for the ISA resource.
For example, if the interrupt level for the Dock I SCSI is 11,
assign 11 for the ISA resource.
6 Click on OK.

160 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Using the Security Plate for the Docking Station
When you dock the computer to the docking station, you can use
the security plate to protect your computer from being removed. To
use the security plate:
1 Attach the security plate to the security keyhole at the right side
of the computer.

Note: 2 Dock the computer to your docking station.

The figure shows an example when
you are using the SelectaDock
Docking System.

3 Lock the security lock of the docking station.

When you leave the computer, remove the key. The security plate
protects your computer from being removed from the docking
station.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 161

162 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide
 Chapter 7. Installing Software

This chapter provides information about the software installed in your

computer and the procedures for installing the necessary device
drivers when reinstalling an operating system.

Installing the Operating System and Device Drivers . . . . . . . 166

Installing Software for OS/2 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Before Installing OS/2 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing IBM OS/2 Warp Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installing OS/2 Warp with Dual Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installing OS/2 Warp with the Boot Manager . . . . . . . . 171
Installing OS/2 Warp Using an External Diskette Drive . . 172
Installing OS/2 Warp Using the Internal CD-ROM and
Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Avoiding Video Problems When Installing OS/2 Warp . . 175
Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . 176
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2 . . . . . 177
Installing the PC Card Director for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2 . . . . 179
Installing the ESS AudioDrive Support Software for OS/2 . . 180
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2 . . . 182
Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver for OS/2 183
Installing the MMPM/2 MPEG Update Diskette . . . . . . 183
Installing the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Device
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Installing Software for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Installing IBM PC DOS Version 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for DOS . . . . . . . . 186
Software Parameters in the CONFIG.SYS . . . . . . . . . 186
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for DOS . . . . . 187
Installing the PC Card Director for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Installing Software for Windows Version 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows 3.11 . . 193
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows 3.11 194
Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 3.11 . . . . . . 194
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows
3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing the MIDI Port Device Driver for Windows 3.11 . . . 196

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 163

Installing Software

Installing the ESS AudioDrive Support Software for Windows

3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows 3.11 . . . . 197
Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and the
Video CD Player for Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing the Video Overlay/Capture Device Driver for
Windows 3.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing the MPEG Device Driver for Windows 3.11 . . . 198
Installing the IBM Video CD Player for Windows 3.11 . . 199
Installing Software for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Installing Microsoft Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows 95 . . . 201
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows 95 . 203
Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . 204
Disabling the PC Card Director for DOS and Windows . . 204
Installing the Socket Services Device Driver . . . . . . . . 205
Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 95 . . . . . . 206
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows 95 207
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software . . . . . . . . 207
Installing the Mwave MIDI Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . 208
Installing the AudioDrive Support Software for Windows 95 . 208
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows 95 . . . . . 209
Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for Windows 95 . . . . 210
Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and the
Video CD Player for Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing the Video Overlay/Capture Device Driver for
Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing the MPEG Device Driver for Windows 95 . . . . 213
Installing the IBM Video CD Player for Windows 95 . . . . 214
Disabling the Docking Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Using Windows 95 with the Dock II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using the Dock II SCSISelect Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using the DIP Switches in the Dock II . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Installing Software for Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51 . 216
Installing Microsoft Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Installing the Video Features Diskette for Windows NT . . . 218
Using the Video Features Diskette for the External Monitor . 219
Installing the PCMCIA Token Ring Device Driver for
Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows NT . 221
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows NT 222

164 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Software

Installing MIDI Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Configuring the Mwave Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Installing the AudioDrive Support Software for Windows NT 223
Changing the Default Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Playback and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Installing the ThinkPad PCI-IDE Driver for Windows NT . . . 225

Chapter 7. Installing Software 165

Installing Software

Installing the Operating System and Device Drivers

If you purchased a preloaded model of the computer, your computer
comes with the following software already installed:
Operating system
ThinkPad Features program
ThinkPad display driver
Infrared device driver
PC Card Director program
760
Mwave Mwave DSP support software
760
ESS ESS AudioDrive support software
760
CD CD-ROM device driver
760
EnhVideo Enhanced Video device driver and MPEG device driver
To use the online book: Online book
Page vii.
When reinstalling an operating system, you must install an operating
system and the software listed above for your computer to operate
as it did at the time of purchase. The online book, however, is
available only at the time of purchase and no diskettes are available
for reinstallation. You should make a backup copy of the online
book before beginning the reinstallation process.

The operating systems supported by your computer are:

IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) Warp Version 3
IBM PC DOS Version 7.0
MS-DOS** Version 6.2
Microsoft Windows Version 3.11
Microsoft Windows 95
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51

Refer to the appropriate section to install your operating system and

its device drivers:
If you are installing OS/2: Go to “Installing Software for OS/2
O S/2

Warp” on page 168.

If you are installing DOS: Go to “Installing Software for DOS”

DOS on page 185.

166 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Software

If you are installing Windows 3.11: Go to “Installing Software

WIN for Windows Version 3.11” on page 189.

If you are installing Windows 95: Go to “Installing Software

WIN
for Windows 95” on page 200.

If you are installing Windows NT: Go to “Installing Software

WIN
for Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51” on page 216.

Important information
Before reinstalling the operating system and the ThinkPad device
drivers:
You need to back up your software and all data files.
An updated version of this chapter may be available on the
Internet. Check the Support section of the IBM PC Company
home page at http://www.pc.ibm.com/support.html for the
latest information or if you have problems.
You need to create all installation diskettes using the Diskette
Factory (diskette backup program), which is preloaded on your
computer. (In some countries, you will find utility and device
driver diskettes packed in the box with the computer.)
To use the Diskette Factory, click on the Diskette Factory icon;
then follow the instructions on the screen.
(In Windows 95, you can find the Diskette Factory icon in the
ThinkPad Tools folder, where you can create only the ThinkPad
device drivers diskette. To create the Windows 95 system
diskettes, select Start, Accessories, System Tools, and then
Create System Disks.)
For the device driver diskettes, also check the IBM PC Company
home page (http://www.pc.ibm.com/support.html). Updated
version of diskettes may be available on the Internet.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 167

Installing OS/2 Software

Installing Software for OS/2 Warp

This section describes how to install OS/2 Warp with DOS and
OS/2
Windows, and OS/2 ThinkPad device drivers in your computer.

Important
Before reinstalling the operating system and device drivers,
create the installation diskettes using the Diskette Factory
program (a diskette backup program that is preloaded on your
computer).

Especially, you must create the OS/2 Warp Video Fix Diskette to
avoid video problems you encounter during installation of OS/2
Warp.

The following shows the software already installed at the time of

purchase. For your computer to work as it did at the time of
purchase, install all of this software:
1 Install OS/2 Warp
760
( CD With the CD-ROM device driver) Page 169.
2 Install the ThinkPad Features program Page 177.
3 Install the PC Card Director Page 178.
4 Install one of the following:
760
Mwave Mwave support software Page 179
or
760
ESS ESS AudioDrive support software Page 180.
5 Install the Infrared device driver Page 181.
6 Install the ThinkPad display driver Page 182.
7 760
Install the Enhanced video and MPEG device driver
EnhVideo
Page 183.

168 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

Before Installing OS/2 Warp

760 Important
ESS
If your computer is the 760EL (ESS AudioDrive model), you
must do the procedure described in this section before you
install OS/2 Warp. Otherwise, the OS/2 installation stops and
you cannot complete the installation.

During the installation of OS/2 Warp using the OS/2 Warp Diskette 1,
the installation stops at the OS/2 logo screen and does not move
beyond the screen. This is because the ESS AudioDrive feature in
the computer uses the I/O address 330h (for the MIDI port), where a
Sony** CD-ROM device driver in the OS/2 Warp Diskette 1 accesses
to detect if the following CD-ROM drive is attached to the computer:
Sony CDU-31A, CDU-7305, CDU-33A, or CDU-7405

To avoid the installation stop, do one of the following, depending on

your situation:
If you are using one of these Sony CD-ROM drives,
refer to the chapter describing the special hardware
considerations in “Special Hardware Considerations” in the
User's Guide to OS/2 Warp and read the parameter information
for the SONY31A.ADD device driver.
After that, you might need to disable the ESS audio, or change
the ESS audio system resource to avoid any resource conflicts.
In that case, start the ThinkPad Features program and register
the Sony CD-ROM's resource information. Then set the
appropriate resources for the ESS audio in the ThinkPad
Features program.
If you are not using these Sony CD-ROM drives, do the
following:
1 Make a backup copy diskette of the OS/2 Warp Diskette 1.
2 Open the CONFIG.SYS file in the backup copy diskette
using your editor, and comment out the Sony device driver
line as follows:
rem BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD

Chapter 7. Installing Software 169

Installing OS/2 Software

3 Delete the file SONY31A.ADD from the backup copy

diskette.
4 Install OS/2 Warp using the backup copy diskette you have
just created.

Installing IBM OS/2 Warp Version 3

Your installation of OS/2 Warp will differ, depending on whether you
use the Dual Boot or the Boot Manager for switching between OS/2
Warp and DOS/Windows.

Which type are you going to use?

Dual Boot Go to page 170.
Boot Manager Go to page 171.

Avoiding Video Problems for OS/2 Warp

If you have a video problem, such as a screen blackout, when
installing OS/2 Warp, go to page 175 to solve the problem.

Installing OS/2 Warp with Dual Boot

To install the DOS ThinkPad Install DOS, Windows, and their ThinkPad Features program before
Features program: installing OS/2 Warp.
Page 187.
To install OS/2 Warp:
To install the Windows ThinkPad
Features program:
Page 194. To install the diskette version of OS/2 Warp, refer to the
OS/2 documentation; however, pay attention to the following
Note: during installation:
If you have the OS/2 Warp FixPak
10 (XR0010) or later, install it after – Select VGA as the Primary Display in the System
you complete the installation of OS/2 Configuration screen.
Warp. Follow the instructions in the
README.1ST file in diskette 1 of – Select No Support Installed, not PCMCIA Feature, at
that FixPak. the System Configuration screen.

170 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

760
CD If you are using a 760ED and installing the CD-ROM
version of OS/2 Warp using the CD-ROM drive, select one
of the following according to your configuration:
– To use the CD-ROM drive and an externally attached
diskette drive, go to page 172.
– To use the CD-ROM drive and the internal diskette drive
by switching between them, go to page 173.
Important
You need at least 90MB of free space on the hard
disk drive.

Installing OS/2 Warp with the Boot Manager

1 Install the Boot Manager, referring to the OS/2 Warp

documentation.
To install the DOS ThinkPad 2 Install DOS and Windows, and the ThinkPad Features
Features program: programs for both DOS and Windows.
Page 187.
3 Install OS/2 Warp:
To install the Windows ThinkPad
Features program: If you are installing the diskette version, refer to the OS/2
Page 194. documentation; however, pay attention to the following:
– Select VGA as the Primary Display at the System
Configuration screen.
Note:
If you have the OS/2 Warp FixPak – Select No Support Installed, not System
10 (XR0010) or later, install it after Configuration, at the System Configuration screen.
you complete the installation of OS/2
760
Warp. Follow the instructions in the – CD Select Non-Listed IDE CD-ROM for the
README.1ST file in diskette 1 of CD-ROM at the System Configuration screen.
that FixPak.
After OS/2 has been successfully installed, make sure you
restart the computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 171

Installing OS/2 Software

760
CD If you are using a 760ED and installing the CD-ROM
version of OS/2 Warp using the CD-ROM drive, select one
of the following according to your configuration:
– To use the CD-ROM drive and an externally attached
diskette drive, go to page 172.
– To use the CD-ROM drive and the internal diskette
drive by switching between them, go to page 173.
Important
You need at least 90MB of free space on the hard
disk drive.

Installing OS/2 Warp Using an External Diskette Drive

1 Ensure that DOS and Windows are installed in the computer.

2 Insert the OS/2 Warp CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3 Open the DOS command prompt and change to the drive for
the CD-ROM drive.
4 Type CDINST and press Enter.
Make copies of the OS/2 Warp diskettes labeled “OS/2 Warp
Installation Diskette” and “OS/2 Warp Diskette 1.”
5 Shut down OS/2 and turn off the computer.
6 Insert the OS/2 Warp Installation Diskette into the external
diskette drive and turn on the computer.
7 When you are prompted to insert OS/2 Warp Diskette 1, insert
it into the external diskette drive and the OS/2 Warp CD-ROM
into the CD-ROM drive.

172 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

Note: 8 Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is

If you have the OS/2 Warp FixPak complete.
10 (XR0010) or later, install it after
you complete the installation of OS/2 Pay attention to the following during installation:
Warp. Follow the instructions in the
Select VGA as the Primary Display at the System
README.1ST file in diskette 1 of
Configuration screen.
that FixPak.
Select No Support Installed, not PCMCIA Feature, at the
System Configuration screen.
Select Non-Listed IDE CD-ROM for the CD-ROM at the
System Configuration screen.
9 Shut down OS/2 and restart the computer.

Installing OS/2 Warp Using the Internal CD-ROM and Diskette Drive
Note: Have ready two formatted, blank 1.44MB diskettes before
The following terms are used in installation.
these instructions:
1 Ensure that you have installed DOS and Windows, and have at
[cd:] Your CD-ROM drive letter,
followed by a colon least 90MB of free space on the hard disk drive.
[c:] Target hard disk drive letter, 2 Insert the OS/2 Warp CD-ROM into the internal CD-ROM drive.
followed by a colon
3 Open the DOS command prompt; then enter the following to
copy all the diskette images from the OS/2 Warp CD-ROM to
the hard disk drive (do not type the [ ] brackets):
xcopy [cd:]\os2image\ . [c:]\os2image\ . /s
copy [cd:]\diskimgs\ . [c:]\os2image
copy [cd:]\diskimgs\os2\35\disk .dsk [c:]\os2image
copy [cd:]\diskimgs\os2\35\disk1.dsk [c:]\os2image
4 Shut down OS/2 and turn off the computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 173

Installing OS/2 Software

To install the diskette drive: 5 Replace the CD-ROM drive with the diskette drive; then turn on
Page 136. the computer.
6 Create the “OS/2 Disk 1” and “OS/2 Warp Installation Diskette”
as follows:
a) Place a “OS/2 Warp Diskette 1” label on a blank diskette;
then enter the following:
C:\>cd os2image
C:\OS2IMAGE\>loaddskf disk1.dsk a: /f/y
Note: b) After the “OS/2 Warp Diskette 1” diskette has been
You can use the E editor supplied created, open the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette and
with DOS or any other editor to edit find the following line:
files.
set os2_shell=sysinst2.exe
Change this line to:
set os2_shell=sysinst2.exe [c:]\os2image
Save the CONFIG.SYS file.
c) Place a “OS/2 Warp Installation Diskette” label on a blank
diskette; then enter the following:
C:\OS2IMAGE\>loaddskf disk .dsk a: /f/y
7 Install OS/2 Warp as follows:
a) With the OS/2 Warp Installation Diskette still inserted in the
diskette drive, restart your computer by pressing
Ctrl+Alt+Del.

174 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

Note: b) Follow the instructions on the screen; however, pay

Because your CD-ROM drive is not attention to the following during installation:
yet installed in the computer and
cannot be recognized automatically Select VGA as the Primary Display at the System
by OS/2 Warp, you need to make Configuration screen.
OS/2 Warp recognize the CD-ROM
Select No Support Installed, not PCMCIA Feature, at
drive.
the System Configuration screen.

Note: Select Non-Listed IDE CD-ROM for the CD-ROM at

If you have the OS/2 Warp FixPak the System Configuration screen.
10 (XR0010) or later, install it after
c) When OS/2 Warp installation is complete, shut down OS/2
you complete the installation of OS/2
and turn off the computer.
Warp. Follow the instructions in the
README.1ST file in diskette 1 of d) Replace the diskette drive with the CD-ROM drive; then
that FixPak. turn on the computer.
The previous steps leave about 45MB of image files on your hard
disk drive. You can leave these files for future reinstallations, or you
can remove them to save hard disk space:
8 Clean up (optional).
a) Open the OS/2 System folder; then open the Drives folder.
b) Open [c:] drive; then click on the OS2IMAGE folder with
the right mouse button to bring up the folders menu.
c) Click on the Delete menu.
When you are asked to confirm deletion, select Yes.

Avoiding Video Problems When Installing OS/2 Warp

If you have a video problem when installing OS/2 Warp, do the

following:
1 Make sure you have created the OS/2 Warp Video Fix Diskette
using the Diskette Factory program.
2 Start installing OS/2 Warp.
3 When prompted to remove OS/2 Warp Diskette 1 and restart
the computer, insert the OS/2 Warp Installation Diskette and
restart the computer instead.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 175

Installing OS/2 Software

4 Continue the installation, following the instructions on the

screen, until the “Welcome” screen appears.
5 Press F3 and go to the command prompt.
6 Insert the OS/2 Warp Video Fix Diskette into the diskette drive;
then type the following command at the command prompt:
a:\repvga c
where c is the drive where OS/2 Warp is installed. The video
driver files will be replaced.
7 Remove any diskettes from the diskette drive; then restart the
computer.
The second half of the Warp installation continues.
8 When selecting a video driver, select a VGA display driver.
9 When prompted to remove any diskettes and restart the
computer, insert the OS/2 Warp Installation Diskette and restart
the computer instead.
10 Repeat steps 4 through 7.
Note: 11 Install the SVGA video mode driver using the Video Features
SVGA means resolution of 1024×768 Diskette for OS/2.
or more with 256 colors or more.
Note
To install the video driver: When you open System Configuration in Selective Install
Page 182. after the video driver installation, Video Graphics Array
[VGA] is shown as the Primary Display (representing the
LCD). However, the video driver is correctly installed if you
have followed the foregoing procedure.

Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for OS/2

760 If you installed a CD-ROM device driver (Non-listed IDE CD-ROM
CD
on the System Configuration screen) when installing OS/2 Warp, you
do not need to install the CD-ROM device driver. Continue with
“Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2” on page 177.

176 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

Have the diskettes that came with the OS/2 system ready; then
install the CD-ROM device driver for OS/2:
1 Start OS/2 Warp; then open OS/2 System, System Setup, and
then Selective Install.
2 Select the CD-ROM Device Support icon.

3 Select Non-listed IDE CD-ROM and click on OK.

4 Click on OK at the System Configuration screen.
5 At the OS/2 Setup and Configuration screen, select Install; then
follow the instructions on the screen.

For information about the software parameter in the CONFIG.SYS

file, refer to the README file in the CD-ROM Driver Diskette.

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2

To install the ThinkPad Features program:
1 Start OS/2 Warp; then insert the Utility Diskette for OS/2 into
the diskette drive.
2 Install the ThinkPad System Management device driver:

a) Open OS/2 System and then System Setup.

b) Select Device Driver Install and click on the Install...
button.
c) Click on ThinkPad System Management Device Driver;
then click on OK.
3 Open the OS/2 screen command prompt.
4 Go to the A: prompt and type INSTALL2; then press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
5 Install the Windows ThinkPad Features program for the
WIN-OS/2 session:
a) Exit the OS/2 screen; then open a WIN-OS/2 full screen.
b) Follow the instructions in “Installing the ThinkPad Features
Program for Windows 3.11” on page 194.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 177

Installing OS/2 Software

6 Install the DOS ThinkPad Features program to use the PS2

commands.
a) Exit the WIN-OS/2 full screen; then open a DOS full screen.
b) Follow the instructions in “Installing the ThinkPad Features
Program for DOS” on page 187.

Installing the PC Card Director for OS/2

When installing an operating system, you need to install the
following device drivers and software associated with PCMCIA
To use PC Card Director: before you can use the PC Cards:
Page 44.
PC Card device drivers:
Note: – Card Services device driver
CardBus PC Cards cannot be used – Socket Services device driver
in OS/2 Warp. – Resource Map Utility device driver
– PC Card Power Management device driver
– PC Card Director utility
PC Card client device drivers (only when PC Card Director does
not support the PC Card)

To install the PC Card Director:

1 Start OS/2 Warp; then open the OS/2 full screen command
prompt.
2 Insert the PC Card Director Diskette for OS/2 and Windows 95
into the diskette drive; then type A:\PCMINST2 and press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
3 Click on OK when you have completed the installation.
4 After the installation is complete, close all applications, remove
the diskette from the diskette drive, and restart the computer.

178 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2

760 If you have multiple operating systems, you might need to install the
Mwave
Mwave DSP support software for each operating system. For
example, to enable OS/2 and Windows applications for Mwave
Note:
functions, install the Mwave DSP support software for both OS/2
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the Mwave DSP
and Windows.
support software.
To install the Mwave DSP support software:

1 Start OS/2 Warp; then open the OS/2 screen command prompt.
2 Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for OS/2 into the
diskette drive; then type A:SETUP and press Enter.
The installation window appears on the screen.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the
installation.
4 Restart OS/2 to make the Mwave features effective.
5 Install Mwave MMPM audio support software as follows:
a) Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette for OS/2 Audio
into the diskette drive; then type A:SETUP at the command
prompt and press Enter.
b) Follow the instructions on the screen.
6 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the
diskette drive; then restart OS/2.

Note
Non-U.S. users must run the Country Selection program in the
Mwave window after the Mwave installation is complete. Restart
the computer after you run Country Selection.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 179

Installing OS/2 Software

When You Use the WIN-OS/2 Environment

If you use the Mwave functions in WIN-OS/2:
1. Install the Mwave DSP support software for Windows in a full
screen WIN-OS/2 environment with the procedure on page
195.
2. Check your WIN-OS/2 Settings and modify them as follows,
referring to your OS/2 manuals:
WIN_RUN_MODE 3.1 Enhanced Compatibility
HW_TIMER ON
INT_DURING_IO ON
DOS_BACKGROUND_EXECUTION ON

Installing the ESS AudioDrive Support Software for OS/2

760 To install the AudioDrive support software:
ESS

1 Start OS/2 Warp; then open the OS/2 full-screen command

prompt.
Note: 2 Insert the AudioDrive Features Diskette for OS/2 into the
When you install OS/2 Warp, you diskette drive; then type A:ESINST; and press Enter.
must select Multimedia Software
Support in the OS/2 Setup and 3 Select AudioDrive ES1688 from the list.
Installation window.
If you encounter the SYS1041 error Make sure the source drive is A:.
message during the AudioDrive If you have WIN-OS/2 installed on your computer, also select
software installation, make sure you ES1688 WinOS2/Windows Audio.
selected the multimedia software
support.

4 Click on Install; then follow the instructions on the screen.

5 When you have completed the installation, restart the
computer.

180 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2

The infrared device driver for OS/2 Warp is included in the
application TranXit for OS/2.

If you have an infrared application such as TranXit version 1.0 for

Windows that runs in WIN-OS/2, install the WIN-OS/2 infrared
device driver:
1 Start OS/2 Warp.
2 If you have not installed DOS and WIN-OS/2 support for OS/2,
install it by referring to your operating system documents.
3 Go to the DOS command prompt and insert the Infrared
Features Diskette into the diskette drive.
4 Type A:UINSTALL and press Enter.
The following screen appears:
Installation Options

Installation Source Drive

Type the SOURCE drive letter (A-Z). When you install a program, the
SOURCE drive letter is the location you are installing FROM.

Source Drive ...

Enter F1=Help F3=Exit

5 Press Enter; then follow the instructions on the screen.

Select Install Win-OS2 ThinkPad InfraRed Driver when you
are asked.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 181

Installing OS/2 Software

Starting TranXit for Windows or Other IR Applications

If you are going to start TranXit version 1.0 for Windows or any
other Windows infrared applications that use the ThinkPad
infrared device driver from:
The Program Manager window, do the following:
1. With the right mouse button, click on the Program
Manager object in the Windows Programs folder or the
WIN-OS2 (full screen or window) object in the Command
Prompts folder.
2. Select Settings, Session, and then WIN-OS/2 Settings,
and modify the following setting as shown:
COM_DIRECT_ACCESS ON
A separate object that you have created for the infrared
application, do the following:
1. With the right mouse button, click on the object.
2. Select Settings, Session, and then check Separate
Session.
3. Select WIN-OS/2 Settings and modify the following
setting as shown:
COM_DIRECT_ACCESS ON

Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2

Note: The display driver enables you to use various screen resolutions and
When installing an operating system, colors for the LCD and external monitor. The display driver also
you need to install the ThinkPad takes advantage of the computer's video capability.
display device driver.

To use the ThinkPad Features Before Installation

program:
Before you begin installing the display driver, set the display
Page 35. device mode to LCD: open the ThinkPad Features program and

select the LCD ( ) icon, or at the command prompt, type PS2

SC LCD and press Enter.

182 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing OS/2 Software

To install the ThinkPad display device driver:

1 Start OS/2 Warp.
2 Insert the Video Features Diskette for OS/2 into the diskette
drive and open the OS/2 full screen or OS/2 window.
3 Go to the A: prompt; then type INSTALL and press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
4 After the installation is complete, remove the diskette, shut
down OS/2, and restart the computer.

Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver for OS/2

760 This section is for computers with the Enhanced Video/MPEG
EnhVideo
features installed.

Important
To use the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG functions, make
sure you have installed the following software before installing
the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG device drivers:
ThinkPad Display Driver (9385) for OS/2 Warp
Mwave DSP support software
Video IN from the OS/2 BonusPak preloaded on the
computer

Installing the MMPM/2 MPEG Update Diskette

Important
This procedure is necessary only for OS/2 Warp Version 3 and
3.01. For versions of OS/2 Warp later than that, skip this
section.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 183

Installing OS/2 Software

To install the MMPM/2 MPEG Update Diskette:

1 Start OS/2 Warp and open the Multimedia folder from the
desktop; then click on the Multimedia Application Install icon.
2 Insert the MMPM/2 MPEG Update Diskette into the diskette
drive.
3 Make sure the drive letter is A:; then click on OK.
4 Select from the list on the screen; then click on Install.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Installing the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG Device Drivers

To install the Video Overlay/Capture and MPEG device drivers:
1 Start OS/2 Warp and open the Multimedia folder from the
desktop; then click on the Multimedia Application Install icon.
2 Insert the MPEG/Video Capture Driver Diskette for OS/2 into
the diskette drive of the computer.
3 Make sure the drive letter is A:; then click on OK.
4 Select all of the driver listed on the screen; then click on Install.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

184 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing DOS Software

Installing Software for DOS

This section describes the installation procedures for DOS Version
DOS 7.0 and its device drivers for your ThinkPad.

Important
Before reinstalling the operating system and device drivers, you
need to create all installation diskettes using the Diskette Factory
program (a diskette backup program that is preloaded on your
computer).

Note: The following shows the software already installed at the time of
Mwave DSP support software for purchase. For your computer to work as it did at the time of
DOS is installed when you install purchase, install all of this software:
Mwave DSP support software for
Windows 3.11.

1 Install DOS Page 185.

2 760
Install the CD-ROM device driver Page 186.
CD

3 Install the ThinkPad Features program Page 187.

4 Install the PC Card Director Page 188.

Installing IBM PC DOS Version 7.0

To install DOS, follow the instructions in the operating-system
documentation. If you also are installing Microsoft Windows 3.11, go
to “Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11” on page 190.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 185

Installing DOS Software

Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for DOS

760 To install the CD-ROM device driver:
CD
1 Start DOS.
Note:
2 Insert the CD-ROM Driver Diskette into the diskette drive; then
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the CD-ROM type A:UINSTALL and press Enter.
device driver.

Note: 3 Select Install IBM ThinkPad CD-ROM Driver for

The default subdirectory is DOS/Windows(**) at the Installation Options screen, then
C:\CDROM\.
follow the instructions on the screen.
4 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the
diskette drive and restart the computer.

Software Parameters in the CONFIG.SYS

When the CD-ROM device driver is installed in your computer, the
installation program (UINSTALL.EXE) automatically modifies the
CONFIG.SYS file and AUTOEXEC.BAT file. The following are the
parameters for the CD-ROM device driver for CONFIG.SYS:

DEVICE=[drive:][path]IBMTPCD.SYS /R [/C] [/S]

The CD-ROM device driver is IBMTPCD.SYS. Make sure this line is

inserted after the EMM386 statement.
/R Enables the resident type device driver. Even when the
CD-ROM drive is not installed at power-on, the device driver
can be loaded in the memory. Remove this option if you
use the CD-ROM drive in a docking station.
[/C] Sets the cache size in the XMS memory. When this
parameter is set, the cache size in the XMS memory is 512
sectors. When it is not set, the default is 0.
[/S] Sets the power-saving mode to OFF. When using DOS
with another operating system (for example, when using it
with OS/2 in dual boot), set the power-saving mode to OFF
using this parameter.

186 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing DOS Software

Note
For the software parameter in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, refer
to the README file in the CD-ROM Driver Diskette.
If you are using DOS SMARTDRV caches and planning to
use a photo CD or multisession discs, you have to add the
/U parameter to the SMARTDRV line in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file. This is because photo CDs or multisession discs are not
compatible with the SMARTDRV caches.
To be able to play CD-i movies in Windows 3.11, do not
cache the CD-ROM drive by the SMARTDRV Version 5.0 or
5.1, which is supplied with PC DOS Version 7.0.

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for DOS

Note: To install the ThinkPad Features program:
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the ThinkPad 1 Start DOS.
Features program.
2 Insert the Utility Diskette for DOS into the diskette drive; then
type A:UINSTALL and press Enter.
The following screen appears:
Installation Options

Installation Source Drive

Type the SOURCE drive letter (A-Z). When you install a program, the
SOURCE drive letter is the location you are installing FROM.

Source Drive ...

Enter F1=Help F3=Exit

3 Press Enter.
4 Select Install DOS ThinkPad Features at the Installation
Options screen; then follow the instructions on the screen.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 187

Installing DOS Software

Installing the PC Card Director for DOS

Note: When installing DOS, you need to install the following software to
Do not install the Phoenix** PCMCIA use the PC Cards:
support in IBM PC DOS 7.0.
PC Card device drivers:
PC Card Director: – Card Services device driver
Page 44. – Socket Services device driver
– Resource Map Utility device driver
– PC Card Power Management device driver
– PC Card Director utility
Note: PC Card client device drivers (only when PC Card Director does
The PC Card client device driver is not support the PC Card)
not part of the preloaded software.
Refer to the manual that came with To install the PC Card Director:
the PC Card to install the device
driver. 1 Start DOS.
2 Insert the PC Card Director Diskette for DOS and Windows into
the diskette drive; then type A: and press Enter.
3 Type PCMINSTD; then press Enter.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen.

Default choices are already highlighted at the Selector screens.
Note: 5 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the
Whenever you update the diskette drive and restart the computer.
CONFIG.SYS file, see page 279.

188 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 3.11 Software

Installing Software for Windows Version 3.11

This section describes the installation procedures for Windows
WIN Version 3.11 and its device drivers for your ThinkPad computer.

Important
Before reinstalling the operating system and device drivers, you
need to create all installation diskettes using the Diskette Factory
program (a diskette backup program that is preloaded on your
computer).

The following shows the software already installed at the time of

purchase. For your computer to work as it did at the time of
purchase, install all of this software:
1 Install DOS Page 185.
760
CD Install the CD-ROM device driver for DOS Page 186.
Install the ThinkPad Features program for DOS Page 187.
2 Install Windows 3.11 (with Advanced Power Management)
Page 190.
3 Install the ThinkPad display driver Page 193.
4 Install the ThinkPad Features program for Windows Page 194.
5 Install the PC Card Director Page 194.
6 Install one of the following:
760
Mwave Mwave support software Page 195.
or
760
ESS ESS AudioDrive support software Page 196.
7 760
Install the MIDI Port device driver Page 196.
EnhVideo
8 Install the Infrared device driver Page 197.
9 760
Install the Enhanced Video/MPEG device driver and Video CD
EnhVideo
Player Page 197.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 189

Installing Windows 3.11 Software

Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11

Windows 3.11 operates in a DOS environment. Install the following
before installing Windows:
DOS Version 7.0 (see your DOS manuals)
760
CD CD-ROM Device Driver for DOS (see page 186)
ThinkPad Features program for DOS (see page 187)
Important
During installation, do the following for Windows to operate
correctly:
When the Windows Setup program asks you to select either
Express Setup or Custom Setup, select C for Custom
Setup.
Install Windows 3.11 with the default VGA display driver that
came with Windows. After you complete the installation of
Windows, install the ThinkPad display driver.

Do the following to install Windows Version 3.11 with Advanced

Power Management (APM):
1 Install Windows Version 3.11 with the APM option:
a) Start the installation as specified in the Windows manual.
Note: b) When the Windows Setup program asks you to select
If you have installed OS/2, the path Express Setup or Custom Setup, type C for Custom
to install Windows may have Setup.
changed to C:\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2
(C is the drive on which you installed
OS/2). If so, change the path to:
C:\WINDOWS

190 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 3.11 Software

c) Continue installing Windows Version 3.11 until the following

screen appears:

Windows Setup
===============

Setup has determined that your system includes the following hardware
and software components. If your computer or network appears on the
Hardware Compatibility List with an asterisk, press F1 for Help.

Computer: MS-DOS System

Display: VGA
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

d) Using the Up Arrow (↑ ), highlight MS-DOS System and

press Enter.
e) Select MS-DOS System with APM from the list and press
Enter.
Verify that Computer has changed to MS-DOS System
with APM. If the item has not changed, return to step 1d.
2 Make sure the Display: choice is set to VGA. (Do not change
this choice.)

Note: 3 When you have completed the installation of Windows, edit the
When Windows Version 3.11 is AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that the computer will use the correct
installed, the computer is
mouse driver:
automatically configured to use the
MOUSE.COM driver provided by a) At the DOS command prompt (usually C:\>), type
Windows Version 3.11. However, for E \AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.
correct operation, your computer
must use the MOUSE.COM driver b) Find the line: C:\WINDOWS\MOUSE.COM /Y
that came with DOS. c) Change it to: C:\DOS\MOUSE.COM /Y
d) Find the line that includes SHARE.EXE and delete that line.
e) Save the file and restart the computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 191

Installing Windows 3.11 Software

4 After installing Windows, you should check the creation date of

the following drivers in the DOS subdirectory and the Windows
subdirectory:
EMM386.EXE (loaded by CONFIG.SYS)
HIMEM.SYS (loaded by CONFIG.SYS)
SMARTDRV.EXE (loaded by AUTOEXEC.BAT)
760
CD MSCDEX.EXE (loaded by AUTOEXEC.BAT)
Then use the newest program between the one for DOS and
the one for Windows for each drivers.
You can easily use the newer one by changing the subdirectory
name in the CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT as follows:
C:\WINDOWS\SMARTDRV.EXE
↓
C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE

When you start Windows from the DOS prompt, do not close the
LCD while the program is loading; if you do, the computer will stop
running.

192 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 3.11 Software

Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows 3.11

Note: Do the following to install the ThinkPad display driver for Windows
When installing an operating system, 3.11 so that you can get a correct display setting and a better
you need to install the ThinkPad performance:
display driver.
1 Start DOS; then go to the WINDOWS subdirectory.
Note: 2 Type SETUP to start the Windows setup program.
You can change the display
resolution type by using the
ThinkPad Features program after 3 Using the Up Arrow (↑ ), highlight Display and press Enter.
completing the installation of the
ThinkPad Features program for 4 Select Other (Requires disk...) from the list.
Windows.
5 Insert the Video Features Diskette for Windows into the
diskette drive; then type A: and press Enter.
6 Select your desired resolution from the menu and press Enter.
Verify that Display has changed to your desired resolution type
(an example is shown in the following screen). If the item has
not changed, return to step 3.

Note:
Cyberxxxx in the right screen Windows Setup
means: ===============

For the TFT model: Cyber9385 Setup has determined that your system includes the following hardware
and software components. If your computer or network appears on the
For the DSTN model: Cyber9320 Hardware Compatibility List with an asterisk, press F1 for Help.

Computer: MS-DOS System with APM

Display: Cyberxxxx 1 24×768 256 small font
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

7 Press Enter to continue the installation.

8 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the
diskette drive and restart the computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 193

Installing Windows 3.11 Software

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows 3.11

Note: If you are going to use Windows, install the ThinkPad Features
When installing an operating system, program for DOS first (see page 187); then do the following to install
you need to install the ThinkPad the ThinkPad Features program for Windows 3.11:
Features program.
1 Start Windows.
2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
Run... from the pull-down menu.
3 Insert the Utility Diskette for Windows into the diskette drive;
then type A:\INSTALLW and press Enter.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Default choices are already highlighted at the Installation
Options screen.

Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 3.11

Note: When installing Windows 3.11, you need to install the PC Card
The PC Card Director for Windows Director. You must install the following device drivers and software
3.11 must be installed with Windows associated with PCMCIA before you can use the PC Cards:
3.11 or a later version with enhanced
mode. Otherwise, it cannot be Card Services device driver
installed. Socket Services device driver
Resource Map Utility device driver
To use PC Card Director: PC Card Power Management device driver
Page 44. PC Card Director Utility
PC Card client device drivers (only when PC Card Director does
not support the PC Card)

To install the PC Card Director:

1 Start Windows.
2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
Run... from the pull-down menu.
3 Insert the PC Card Director Diskette for DOS and Windows into
the diskette drive; then type A:PCMINSTW and press Enter.

194 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 3.11 Software

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the

installation.
Default choices are already highlighted at the choice screens.
5 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the
diskette drive and restart the computer.

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows 3.11

760 To install the Mwave DSP support software:
Mwave
1 Start Windows.
Note:
When installing an operating system,
2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
you need to install the Mwave DSP Run... from the pull-down menu.
support software.
3 Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for Windows into
the diskette drive; then type A:SETUP and press Enter.
Attention:
Before you install the Mwave DSP 4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
support software, close all open
Default choices are already highlighted at the choice screens.
applications.

5 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the

diskette drive and restart the computer.
Note
Non-U.S. users must run the Country Selection program in
the Mwave window after the Mwave installation is complete.
Restart the computer after you run Country Selection.

If this is your first time to install the Mwave DSP support software for
Windows, also install the MIDI sample files as follows:
6 Follow the same procedures from step 2 to step 5; however,
use the MIDI Samples Diskette 1 instead of the Mwave DSP
Features Diskette 1 for Windows.
7 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette from the
diskette drive and restart the computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 195

Installing Windows 3.11 Software

Installing the MIDI Port Device Driver for Windows 3.11

760 To use the MIDI port, when connecting a MIDI keyboard device or
EnhVideo
external synthesizer, install the Mwave MIDI Port device driver:

1 Select the Control Panel from the Main window in the Windows
Program Manager; then select Drivers.
2 Select Add...; then select Unlisted or Updated Driver.
3 Select OK.
4 Type C:\MWW\MIDIPORT and select OK.
MIDIPORT is the subdirectory name where you have installed the
Mwave DSP support software.
5 Select Mwave MIDI Port Driver; then select OK.

Installing the ESS AudioDrive Support Software for Windows

3.11
760 To install the AudioDrive support software:
ESS
1 Start Windows.
2 Select File... from the Program Manager window; then select
Run... from the pull-down menu.
3 Insert the AudioDrive Features Diskette for Windows into the
diskette drive of your computer; then type A:\SETUP and press
Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the
installation.

196 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 3.11 Software

Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows 3.11

Note: To install the infrared device driver:
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the Infrared 1 Start Windows; then insert the Infrared Features Diskette into
device driver. the diskette drive.
2 Go to the DOS command prompt; then type A:UINSTALL and
press Enter.
The following screen appears:
Installation Options

Installation Source Drive

Type the SOURCE drive letter (A-Z). When you install a program, the
SOURCE drive letter is the location you are installing FROM.

Source Drive ...

Enter F1=Help F3=Exit

3 Press Enter; then follow the instructions on the screen.

Select Install Windows ThinkPad InfraRed Driver when you
are asked.

Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and the

Video CD Player for Windows 3.11
760 To use the Enhanced Video functions in Windows 3.11, you must
EnhVideo
install the ThinkPad display driver (Cyber...) and the Mwave DSP
support software before installing the Enhanced Video device
drivers.

Installing the Video Overlay/Capture Device Driver for Windows 3.11

The Video Overlay/Capture device driver enables the video in-out
port on Video for Windows or compatible software. Install Video for
Windows or compatible software; then do the following to install the
video overlay/capture device driver:
1 Start Windows.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 197

Installing Windows 3.11 Software

2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select

Run... from the pull-down menu.
3 Insert the MPEG/Video Capture Driver Diskette for Windows
into the diskette drive; then type A:SETUP and press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
4 After the installation is complete, remove the diskette and
restart the computer to activate the Video Overlay/Capture
device driver.

To run the video capture and playback functions, refer to the Video
for Windows or compatible software manuals. To install the MPEG
device driver, proceed to the following section.

Installing the MPEG Device Driver for Windows 3.11

The MPEG device driver enables playback for MPEG motion videos,
CD-i movies, and video CDs.

Important
If this is not your first time installing the MPEG device driver for
Windows 3.11, remove IBM MPEG-2 and CD-i/VideoCD from the
Installed Driver list in the Drivers menu.

To install the MPEG device driver:

1 Install the Microsoft Win32s** driver:
a) Start Windows.
b) Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
Run... from the pull-down menu.
c) Insert the Microsoft Win32s Setup Diskette 1 into the
diskette drive; then type A:\SETUP and press Enter. Follow
the instructions on the screen.
d) After you have completed the installation, restart Windows.
2 Click on Control Panel from the Main window.
3 Click on Drivers; then click on the Add button.
4 Select Unlisted or Updated Driver; then click on OK.

198 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 3.11 Software

5 Insert the MPEG Features Diskette for Windows into the

diskette drive of the computer.
6 Make sure the drive letter is A:; then click on OK and follow the
instructions on the screen.
Install all the drivers listed by repeating steps 2 on page 198 to
6. After you have completed the installation, restart Windows.

Installing the IBM Video CD Player for Windows 3.11

The IBM Video CD Player for Windows enables playback of video
CDs or CD-i movies with more options than with the Media player:
1 Start Windows.
2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
Run... from the pull-down menu.
3 Insert the Video CD Player Install Diskette into the diskette
drive; then type A:SETUP and press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 199

Installing Windows 95 Software

Installing Software for Windows 95

This section describes the installation procedures for Windows 95
WIN
and its device drivers for your ThinkPad computer.

Important
Before reinstalling the operating system and device drivers, you
need to create all installation diskettes using the Diskette Factory
program (a diskette backup program that is preloaded on your
computer).

The following shows the software already installed at the time of

purchase. For your computer to work as it did at the time of
purchase, install all of this software:
1 Install Windows 95 Page 201.
2 Install the ThinkPad display driver Page 201.
3 Install the ThinkPad Features program Page 203.
4 Install the PC Card Director Page 204.
5 Install one of the following:
760
Mwave Mwave support software Page 207.
or
760
ESS ESS AudioDrive support software Page 208.
6 Install the Infrared support software Page 209.
7 760
Install the CD-ROM device driver Page 210.
CD

8 Install the Enhanced video/MPEG device driver and Video CD

Player Page 212.

Also, if you use the docking station, see page 214 and page 215.

200 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

Installing Microsoft Windows 95

Install Windows 95 as described in its documentation.
To Avoid Problems While Installing
If you encounter a problem while installing Windows 95, refer to
the following:
If the screen blacks out during installation, do the following:
1. When the screen blacks out, wait until the hard disk
activity stops (until the hard disk indicator disappears);
then restart the computer.
2. Start the Windows 95 setup from the beginning.
3. On the Safe Recovery screen of the Windows 95 Setup
Wizard, select Use Safe Recovery (recommended);
then click on the Next> button.
4. On the Setup Options screen of the Windows 95 Setup
Wizard, select Custom; then click on the Next> button.
5. On the Analyzing Your Computer screen of the Windows
95 Setup Wizard, select Yes, redetect now; then click
on the Next> button.
Follow the instructions to complete the installation of
Windows 95.
If you encounter Unknown Hardware Found messages during
installation, select Do not install a driver (Windows will
not prompt you again).

Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows 95

To install the ThinkPad display driver for Windows 95, do the
following:
1 Start Windows 95.
2 Open My Computer, Control Panel, and System; then click
on the Device Manager tab.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 201

Installing Windows 95 Software

3 Click on the + mark for Display adapters.

4 Click on the Trident** Super VGA, and click on the Remove
button. Click on OK when prompted to remove the device.
5 Select No when prompted to restart Windows 95.

Windows 95 will restart.

6 Click on the + mark for Other devices.
7 Click on PCI VGA-Compatible Display Adapter and click on
the Properties button.
8 Click on the Driver tab, and click on the Change driver button.
9 In the Select Hardware Type dialog, select Display adapters
and click on OK.
10 Insert the Video Features Diskette for Windows 95 into the
diskette drive; then click on the Have Disk button and click on
OK.
11 Make sure the following is shown as the selection:
For TFT model: IBM ThinkPad (Cyber9385/82) PCI
For DSTN model: IBM ThinkPad (Cyber9320) PCI
Then click on OK.

12 Click on OK to install the driver into the computer.

13 When prompted to restart, click on Yes; then remove the
diskette from the drive and restart Windows 95.

202 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

If you want to change the monitor type, screen resolution, or color

depth, do the following:
14 Move the mouse pointer to the desktop and click the right
mouse button.
When pop-up menu appears, select Properties.

15 In the Display Properties window, click on the Setting tab;

then click on the Change Display Type button.
16 Click on the Change button in the Monitor Type box.
Note: 17 If you are attaching an external monitor, select the appropriate
If you are attaching an external monitor from the list. If not, select Laptop Display Panel
monitor and not sure what to choose,
(1024x768) or Laptop Display Panel (800x600).
select Super VGA 1280x1024.
18 Click on OK; then click on Close.
19 In the Desktop area box, drag the slider to the appropriate
resolution, such as 1024 by 768 pixels; then click on OK.
20 Select your favorite color depth (for example, 256 color) from
the Color palette.
21 When prompted to resize the desktop, click on OK.
The desktop size (screen resolution) changes.

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows 95

The ThinkPad Features program for Windows also works for
Windows 95.
If you installed Windows 95 on a computer in which DOS,
Windows, and the ThinkPad Features program were already
installed, the ThinkPad Features program is migrated into the
“Start Menu” of Windows 95 automatically.
To start the ThinkPad Features program:
1 Click on Start; then select Programs.
2 Select ThinkPad; then select ThinkPad Features.
If you installed Windows 95 on a blank hard disk or if you have
not installed the ThinkPad Features program, install the

Chapter 7. Installing Software 203

Installing Windows 95 Software

ThinkPad Features program using the Utility Diskette for

Windows supplied with the computer:
1 Insert ThinkPad Utility Diskette for Windows into the
diskette drive.
2 Click on Start; then click on Run....
3 Type a:INSTALLW and click on OK.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 95

Note: The following is a summarized procedure to use the PCMCIA
The ThinkPad computer has three features in Windows 95 (each step is explained in detail later):
different sets of PCMCIA Feature
software: one for DOS/Windows, one 1. If you have already installed the PC Card Director for DOS and
for OS/2 Warp, and one for Windows Windows, disable it (enable the Windows 95 Integrated PCMCIA
95. support software).
2. Install the Socket Services device driver.
Note:
CardBus PC Cards cannot be used 3. Install the PC Card Director for Windows 95.
in Windows 95.

Disabling the PC Card Director for DOS and Windows

If the PC Card Director for DOS and Windows has been already
installed on your computer, you must remove the PC Card Director
for DOS and Windows before installing the PCMCIA support software
for Windows 95. This is because the Windows 95 installation
program does not automatically remove the PC Card Director for
DOS and Windows.

To remove the PC Card Director for DOS and Windows, do the

following (this procedure also enables the Windows 95 Integrated
PCMCIA support software):
1 Start Windows 95; then select My Computer, Control Panel,
and then PC Card.
2 Select No for the question “Are you using a PC card to install
Windows?” and click on Next.

204 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

3 Select No for the question “Do you want to review your system
files and select real-mode PC card drivers so Windows can
disable them?” and click on Finish.

4 Complete the Windows 95 PCMCIA support setup; then restart

your computer.

You have removed the PC Card Director for DOS and Windows. To
install the ThinkPad PC Card Director for Windows 95, do the
following section.

Installing the Socket Services Device Driver

Prepare your Windows 95 product diskettes or CD-ROM, if you do
not already have the Windows 95 integrated PCMCIA support
software installed on your computer.

To install the ThinkPad Socket Services device driver for Windows

95:

1 Start Windows 95; then select My Computer, Control Panel,

and then System.
2 Click on the Device Manager tab.
3 Click on the + mark for PCMCIA socket.
4 Double-click on PCIC or compatible PCMCIA controller.
5 Click on the Driver tab to see the Driver files: list.
6 Click on the Change Driver... button.
7 Click on the Have Disk... button.
8 Insert the PC Card Director Diskette for OS/2 and Windows 95
into the diskette drive; then click on the OK button.
You will see the “PCIC or compatible PCMCIA controller on
IBM system” item in the “Models:” list.
9 Click on the OK button.
IBMCSS01.VXD and IBMPCDIF.VXD will be listed in the Driver
files: list.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 205

Installing Windows 95 Software

10 Click on the OK button.

Windows 95 now starts copying files. The Insert Disk panel
asks for one of the Windows 95 installation diskettes or the
CD-ROM.
11 Change the source for Copying files from: to A:\ when
Windows 95 tries to copy IBMCSS01.VXD or IBMPCDIF.VXD.
12 Insert the PC Card Director Diskette for OS/2 and Windows 95
into the diskette drive; then click on OK.
IBMCSS01.VXD and IBMPCDIF.VXD are copied from the
diskette.
13 Click on the OK button at the Insert Disk panel.
Note: 14 Click on the Skip File button at the Copying Files... panel when
These files were copied when you Windows 95 tries to copy the following files:
installed the Windows 95 integrated
PCMCIA support software. CARDDRV.EXE
CSMAPPER.SYS
FLS1MTD.VXD
FLS2MTD.VXD
PCCARD.VXD
SRAMMTD.VXD
15 Restart the computer.

Installing the PC Card Director for Windows 95

To install the PC Card Director for Windows 95, do the following:
1 Start Windows 95; then open My Computer, Control Panel,
and then Add/Remove Programs.
2 Click on the Install... button.
3 Insert the PC Card Director Diskette for OS/2 and Windows 95
into the diskette drive; then click on the Next> button.
4 Click on the Finish button when you see “A:\INSTALLP.EXE”
on the screen.
5 Click on the Continue button when the opening panel of the
installation program appears on the screen. Follow the
instructions on the screen.

206 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows 95

760 Do one of the following:
Mwave
If you are installing the Mwave DSP support software for
Windows for the first time, you need to install Mwave DSP
support software for Windows 95 and MIDI sample files.
If you have already installed the Mwave DSP support software
for Windows, you need to install only the Mwave DSP support
software. You do not need to install the MIDI sample files.

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software

To install the Mwave DSP support software:
1 Start Windows 95; then click on Start, and then Run....
2 Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for Windows 95 into
the diskette drive; then type A:SETUP and press Enter.
The Mwave installation window appears and prompts you to
input the destination directory for the software. If the default
directory is OK, press Enter. Otherwise, type a directory name
and press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
3 If you are installing the Mwave DSP support software for the
first time, go to “Installing the Mwave MIDI Sample Files” on
page 208 and follow the instructions. Otherwise, remove any
diskette from the diskette drive and restart Windows 95.

Note
Non-U.S. users must run the Country Selection program in the
Mwave window after the Mwave installation is complete. Restart
the computer after you run Country Selection.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 207

Installing Windows 95 Software

Encounter a problem?
If you encounter a problem when using the Mwave DSP features
for Windows 95 after installation, verify that “C:\MWW\DLL” is
included in the PATH statement of AUTOEXEC.BAT.

Installing the Mwave MIDI Sample Files

To play MIDI files on your computer, install the Mwave MIDI sample
files as follows:
1 Start Windows 95; then click on Start, and then Run....
2 Insert the MIDI Samples Diskette 1 into the diskette drive; then
type A:SETUP and press Enter.
The Mwave installation window appears and prompts you to
input the destination directory for the software. If the default
directory is OK, press Enter. Otherwise, type a directory name
and press Enter.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen. After the installation is
completed, remove any diskette from the diskette drive; then
restart Windows 95.

Installing the AudioDrive Support Software for Windows 95

760 When you install Windows 95, it might detect the AudioDrive chip
ESS
installed in your computer, and automatically install the required
audio software in your hard disk drive. However, the version of the
AudioDrive support software supplied with Windows 95 might be an
earlier version than the one needed for your computer.

In any case, you should reinstall the AudioDrive support software as

follows:

1 Start Windows 95; then open My Computer.

2 Click on Control Panel and then System to open the System
Properties window.
3 Click on the Device Manager tab; then double-click on Sound,
video, and game controllers from the list.

208 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

4 Double-click on ESS AudioDrive; then click on the Driver tab.

5 Click on the Change Driver button; then click on the Have
Disk... button.
6 Insert the AudioDrive Features Diskette for Windows 95 into the
diskette drive; then type A: and click on OK.
If an error message appears on the screen, do steps 7 to 9. If the
installation begins without any problem, go to step 10.
7 Click on OK until you see the following message:
Insert Disk

Please insert the disk labeled ’Install Disk 1’, and then click OK.

OK

8 Make sure the AudioDrive Features Diskette for Windows 95 is

inserted in the diskette drive; then click on OK.
9 Type A: at the Copy Files From window; then click on OK.
10 After the installation is complete, click on the Close button.

Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows 95

To install the infrared device driver for Windows 95, do the following:
1 Start Windows 95; then go to the MS-DOS command prompt.
2 Insert the Infrared Features Diskette into the diskette drive; then
type A:UINSTALL and press Enter.
3 At the Installation Options screen, press Enter to accept the
default source drive.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
4 Select Install Windows ThinkPad Infrared Driver when you
are asked.
Make sure you specify the directory where you have installed
Windows 95 when asked.

To make sure that the infrared port is configured correctly, do the

following:

Chapter 7. Installing Software 209

Installing Windows 95 Software

1 Start Windows 95 and select My Computer.

2 Click on Control Panel and then System.
3 Click on the Device Manager tab; then see if the Generic IrDA
Compatible Device node has (COM1) or (COM2).
If not, do the following:
a) Go to the MS-DOS command prompt.
b) Type edit c:\windows\inf\msports.inf and press Enter.
c) Locate the following line:
% PNP 51 .DeviceDesc%=NoDrv, PNP 51

Change this line to:

% PNP 51 .DeviceDesc%=ComPort, PNP 51

d) Save the changed file and exit the MS-DOS command

prompt.
e) In the Device Manager panel, click on Generic IrDA
Compatible Device node.
f) Click on Remove and then Yes to remove this node
temporarily.
g) Click on Refresh, then Yes to register this node using the
new port definition.
h) Restart Windows 95.

Installing the CD-ROM Device Driver for Windows 95

760 This section describes how to disable unnecessary DOS/Windows
CD
CD-ROM device driver.
If you installed Windows 95 on a blank hard disk drive without
DOS and Windows, Windows 95 has automatically installed a
generic ATAPI CD-ROM device driver for your ThinkPad's
CD-ROM drive. You do not need to do the following procedure.
Go to “Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and
the Video CD Player for Windows 95” on page 212.

210 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

If you installed Windows 95 in a computer on which DOS and

Windows had been already installed, you need to disable the
DOS/Windows CD-ROM device driver to use the correct
Windows 95 generic ATAPI CD-ROM device driver.

To disable the DOS/Windows CD-ROM device drivers:

1 Start Windows 95 and go to the MS-DOS command prompt.
Note: 2 Open the CONFIG.SYS file; then find the following line:
The default subdirectory for
C:\xxxxxx is C:\CDROM. DEVICE=C:\xxxxxx\IBMTPCD.SYS /R
xxxxxx is the subdirectory where you have installed the
CD-ROM device driver. If you cannot find the line, quit the file
and go to step 4.
3 Comment out the line to change it as follows:
REM DEVICE=C:\xxxxxx\IBMTPCD.SYS /R
If the line is already commented out, quit the file and go to the
next step.
Note: 4 Open the AUTOEXEC.BAT file; then find the following line:
The default subdirectory for
C:\xxxxxx is C:\CDROM. C:\xxxxxx\MSCDEX.EXE /D:TPCD 1 /M:15
xxxxxx is the subdirectory where you have installed the
CD-ROM device driver. If you cannot find the line, quit the file
and go to step 6.
5 Comment out the line to change it as follows:
REM C:\xxxxxx\MSCDEX.EXE /D:TPCD 1 /M:15
If the line is already commented out, quit the file and go to the
next step.
6 Exit the DOS command prompt; then reboot the system.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 211

Installing Windows 95 Software

Installing the Enhanced Video/MPEG Device Driver and the

Video CD Player for Windows 95
760 To use the Enhanced Video functions in Windows 95, you must
EnhVideo
install the ThinkPad display driver (Cyber...) and the Mwave DSP
support software before installing the Enhanced Video device
drivers.

Installing the Video Overlay/Capture Device Driver for Windows 95

The Video Overlay/Capture device driver enables the video in-out
port and Video for Windows (a standard component in Windows 95)
or its compatible software.

To install the Video Overlay/Capture device driver for Windows 95:

1 Start Windows 95; then click on My Computer, Control Panel,
and then Add New Hardware.
2 Click on Next>; then select No to the question Search for your
new hardware?.
3 Click on Next>; then select Sound, video, and game
controllers.
4 Click on Next>; then click on Have Disk.
5 Insert the MPEG/Video Capture Driver Diskette for Windows 95
into the diskette drive; then select OK.
6 Install all the drivers listed on the screen.
You cannot install multiple drivers at the same time.
7 After the installation is complete, remove the diskette from the
diskette drive.
8 Restart the computer to make the video overlay/capture device
driver effective.

To use the video capture and playback functions, refer to the

Windows 95 documentation or your video capture/playback software
manual.

212 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

To install the MPEG device driver, proceed to the following section.

Installing the MPEG Device Driver for Windows 95

The MPEG device driver enables playback for MPEG motion video,
CD-i movies, and Video CDs on your computer. To install the MPEG
driver for Windows 95:
1 Start Windows 95; then click on My Computer.
2 Click on Control Panel and then Add New Hardware.
3 Click on Next>; then select No to the question Search for your
new hardware?
4 Click on Next>; then select Sound, video and game
controller.
5 Click on Next>.
6 Insert the MPEG Features Diskette for Windows 95 into the
diskette drive; then click on Have Disk....
7 Highlight IBM MPEG CD-i/VideoCD (mci); then click on OK.
8 Click on OK; then click on Finish.
9 Click on Finish.
10 When Windows 95 prompts you to restart the computer, click
on No, and repeat steps 2 to 9 to install IBM MPEG
Files/ISO9660 (mci), by selecting IBM MPEG Files/ISO9660
(mci) in step 7.
11 When Windows 95 prompts you to restart the computer, click
on No, and repeat steps 2 to 9 to install IBM MPEG PCI Bridge
by selecting IBM MPEG PCI Bridge in step 7.
If this is the first installation of the IBM MPEG PCI Bridge, you
must do the following once. This procedure removes the device
from the unknown class and adds it to the sound, video, and
game controllers.
a) Select Control Panel, System, and then Device Manager.
b) Select Other Devices and PCI Multimedia Device.
c) Select Remove; then click on OK.
12 Shut down Windows 95 and restart the computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 213

Installing Windows 95 Software

Installing the IBM Video CD Player for Windows 95

The IBM Video CD Player application enables the playback of video
CDs and CD-i movies with more options than the Windows 95
standard Media Player. To install the IBM Video CD Player:
1 Start Windows 95; then click on the Start button and click on
Run....
2 Insert the Video CD Player Install Diskette into the diskette
drive; then type A:SETUP and press Enter.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Disabling the Docking Control Program

All docking functions, once provided by the ThinkPad Docking
Control Utility program for Windows, are now supported by the
ThinkPad Plug-and-Play BIOS and Windows 95.

If you have installed Windows 95 on a computer in which the

Docking Control Utility for Windows had already been installed, stop
this utility program from working as follows:
Note: 1 Open the WIN.INI file using your editor; then remove the
To open the WIN.INI file, type EDIT following statement:
WIN.INI and press Enter.
[windows]
:
load=C:\THINKPAD\DOCKWIN.EXE ← Remove this statement
:
2 Save and close the file.
3 Open the SYSTEM.INI file using your editor; then remove this
statement:
[386Enh]
:
device=IBMPNP.386 ← Remove this statement
4 Save and close the file; then restart Windows to make the
changes effective.

214 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows 95 Software

Using Windows 95 with the Dock II

When you use the Dock II with your computer and Windows 95, you
need to disable the host adapter SCSI BIOS for Dock II. You can
disable the host adapter SCSI BIOS by using either the Dock II
SCSISelect** utility or the DIP switches in the Dock II:

Using the Dock II SCSISelect Utility

1 Attach your computer to the Dock II and turn on the computer.
2 Press and hold the Ctrl key; then press the A key when
prompted at boot time.
3 Select Configure/View Host Adapter Settings and disable the
Host Adapter BIOS.

Using the DIP Switches in the Dock II

To use the DIP switches, refer to the section “Using the SCSI
controller” in the Dock II User's Guide.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 215

Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Installing Software for Windows NT Workstation Version

3.51
This section describes the installation procedures for Windows NT
WIN
Workstation Version 3.51 (hereafter called Windows NT) and its
device drivers for your computer.

Before you install Windows NT in your computer, you may need to

get some updated software from IBM (or Microsoft) as follows:

How to Get the Updated Software

IBM PC Company is providing the updated software through
several channels so that you can set up Windows NT on your
computer with the information described here:
WWW Server on the Internet:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/files.html
Select IBM Portables, Notebooks, and then Laptops Files.
FTP Site:
ftp.pc.ibm.com/pub/mobiles
CompuServe** ThinkPad Forum:
Join CompuServe ThinkPad Forum (GO THINKPAD) and
download the necessary software from the library.
IBM PC Company BBS:
919-517-0001

If you cannot get the updated software from either one, contact
your IBM representative, or contact IBM HelpCenter
(1-800-772-2227 in the U.S.) for more information.

216 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Install the following diskettes to use Windows NT on your ThinkPad

computer:

1 Install Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Version 3.51 or later

Page 218.
2 Install the ThinkPad Video Features Diskette for Windows NT 3.51
Page 218.
3 Install the Windows NT PCMCIA Token Ring Device Driver,
NTTRCC for IBM PCMCIA Token Ring User Page 220.
4 Install the Windows NT ThinkPad Features Program Diskette,
UTTP1WNT Page 221.
5 Install one of the following:
760
Mwave The Windows NT Mwave Diskette Page 222.
or
760
ESS The Windows NT ESS Audio Driver Diskette
Page 223.
6 Install the ThinkPad PCI-IDE Driver for Windows NT Page 225.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 217

Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Installing Microsoft Windows NT

Note: Before Installing Windows NT
You can install Windows NT using a
You need to read the following before installing:
built in CD-ROM drive or the
CD-ROM drive of the SCSI CD-ROM Review the Windows NT installation guide. If you need to
in the IBM docking station. use such PC Card hard disk drives (such as the IBM
105MB/260MB hard disk drive, Integral Peripherals Viper
Note: 105MB/260MB disk, Maxtor Mobile Max131, or the other
When you install a later version of PCMCIA ATA storage devices), insert it in the PC Card slot
Windows NT 3.51, you do not need before you start the Windows NT installation.
to follow this instruction about a
video problem. Windows NT recognizes the PCMCIA hard disk only at
installation to set up the necessary device driver.
Install Windows NT with Custom Setup and specify the
video display as Standard VGA (640x480, 16 colors).
Otherwise, the screen might black out when you start
Windows NT 3.51 the first time after the installation.

To install Windows NT, refer to the installation instruction for

Windows NT.

Installing the Video Features Diskette for Windows NT

To display more than 16 colors, install the Video Features Diskette:
1 Start Windows NT, and log on with the user ID authorized as an
administrator.
2 Click on Control Panel and then Display.
3 At the Display Setting menu screen, click on Change Display
Type..., and at the Display Type menu, click on Change.
4 Click on Other... at the Select Device menu.
5 Insert the Video Features Diskette for Windows NT in the
diskette drive.
6 From the display devices in the selection list, select IBM
ThinkPad (Cyber9320/9385/9382) and click on Install.
7 Follow the instructions on the screen.

218 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

8 Restart Windows NT to make the change effective.

The display resolution has been set to “640x480/256 colors” as the

default.

To change the resolution or refresh rate, do the following:

1 Go to Control Panel and click on Display.
2 At the Display Setting menu, click on List All Modes, and
select the color palette, desktop area, and refresh frequency as
you want to set.
3 Click on Test and make sure the selected mode is displayed
correctly. Follow the instructions on the screen.
4 Restart Windows NT to make the change effective.

Using the Video Features Diskette for the External Monitor

If you attach an external monitor to the computer, do the following to
use the SVGA video driver with the attached monitor:
1 Start Windows NT, and log on with the user ID authorized as an
administrator.
2 Click on Display in Control Panel.
3 At the Display Settings menu, click on List All Modes; then
select the color palette, desktop area, and refresh frequency as
you want to set.
4 Click on Test to make sure that the selected mode is displayed
correctly on the monitor.
If the selection is OK, Windows NT prompts you to restart the
computer.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 219

Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Note
If you install the ThinkPad Features program for Windows
NT, you can switch the display output type—CRT (external
monitor) only, Both, or LCD only, using the ThinkPad
Features program.
If your external monitor displays with flicker noise or if the
screen image is unstable, you can adjust the monitor refresh
rate as follows:
Using the ThinkPad Features program (Display Advanced
Setup Menu), specify your SVGA monitor type, select
the appropriate Refresh Rate, and then click on OK to
adjust with your monitor type.

Installing the PCMCIA Token Ring Device Driver for Windows

NT
Windows NT comes with integrated PCMCIA support for some PC
Cards. The PCMCIA device driver included in Windows NT does not
support the IBM PCMCIA 16/4 Token Ring Credit Card adapter, IBM
PCMCIA 16/4 Token Ring Credit Card adapter II, and IBM PCMCIA
Token Ring Auto 16/4 Credit Card adapter.

When you use these token ring cards, you need to install the IBM
PCMCIA Token Ring Device Driver. Use the Windows NT PCMCIA
Token Ring Device Driver files in NTTRCC.ZIP for your Windows NT.

To install the device driver:

Note
Before you install this driver, you must first install Windows NT
version 3.51 Service Pack #2 or a later release.

1 Click on Main in the Program Manager screen. Then click on

Control Panel, Network, and Add Adapter.
Windows NT prepares a list of the network adapters it supports.
2 Click on the dropdown list icon, and scroll to the bottom of the
list and click on <Other> Requires disk from manufacturer.

220 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

3 When you are prompted, insert the driver diskette in the

diskette drive. Follow the instructions on the screen.
4 When you are finished adding the adapter, click on OK and
follow the instructions on the screen.

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows NT

Note: To install the ThinkPad Features program:
If you have already installed an old
version of the ThinkPad Features 1 Start Windows NT, and insert the ThinkPad Feature Program
program and are running the Diskette for Windows NT into the diskette drive; then open
Fuel-Gauge program, close the Windows NT File Manager. Select Drive A on the File
Fuel-Gauge program before the Manager menu.
installation.
2 Double-click on INSTALLN.EXE. Follow the instructions on the
screen.
Notices
This section describes some notices you need to aware when you
use the Fuel-Gauge program or personalization feature:
About the suspend and resume options
If you encounter some problems with any device when entering
suspend or resuming, disable the suspend and resume options
in the ThinkPad Features program's power mode setting ( ).
When you set the Will not suspend even if LCD is closed
Attention:
option at the suspend/resume options menu, all the activities to
You must manually shut down the
computer when the battery is low. enter suspend mode (such as Fn+F4, suspend timer,
The computer will not go to suspend Fuel-Gauge program, or low-battery suspend) are inhibited.
automatically. After you set this option, restart Windows NT to make the
change effective.
Personalization program: Using personalization editor
Page 116.
When you finish creating your personal data, you must save it in
the “ThinkPad Utility Diskette for DOS/Personalization.” Have
ready this diskette before using the personalization feature. The
Windows NT ThinkPad Feature Program diskette does not
contain the function available in the “Utility Diskette for
DOS/Personalization,” such as storing the personalization data
into the computer's nonvolatile memory.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 221

Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows NT

760 To install the Mwave support software:
Mwave
1 Start Windows NT and insert the Windows NT Mwave
Note: installation disk #1 in the diskette drive.
To use the Mwave DSP feature in
Windows NT, your computer must 2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
have a minimum of 16 MB of Run... from the pull-down menu.
memory.
3 Type A:\SETUP in the Open window.
4 Click on OK, and follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
Non-U.S. users must run the Country Selection program in the
Mwave window after the Mwave installation is complete. Restart
the computer after you run Country Selection.

Installing MIDI Sample Files

To use MIDI, install the MIDI sample files separately from the Mwave
installation:
1 Insert the MIDI installation disk in the diskette drive.
2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then select
Run... from the pull-down menu.
3 Type A:\SETUP in the Open window.
4 Select Yes when asked if you wish to use the samples.
5 When the installation is complete, restart the computer.

Configuring the Mwave Modem

After installing the Mwave driver, you need to configure the

communication port number to assign the Mwave modem resources
for Windows NT:
1 Start the ThinkPad Feature program, and double-click on the
Modem ( ) icon.

222 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Note: 2 Select one of the COM ports in the window.

A warning message appears if the
COM port is already used. 3 Click on OK.
4 In the Main group, double-click on Control Panel. Then
double-click on Ports.
5 Verify that the list of COM ports includes the COM port that you
chose in the ThinkPad Feature program. If not, click on Add.
When the port is listed, double-click on it.
6 On the Advanced Settings dialog box, select the following
settings:

COM Port Base I/O Port Address IRQ

COM1 03F8 4
COM2 02F8 3
COM3 03E8 4
COM4 02E8 3

Select the FIFO Enabled check box.

7 Select OK.
If you have made any changes, restart the computer to make
the changes effective.

Installing the AudioDrive Support Software for Windows NT

760 Using the Audio Driver diskette, you can play back or record the
ESS
WAVE/MIDI audio function in Windows NT.

To install the ESS AudioDrive support software:

1 Start Windows NT and go to Main. Click on Control Panel and
then Drivers.
2 At the Install Driver menu, click on Add... and select Unlisted
or Updated Driver.
3 Specify the drive and path name as A:; then select OK.
4 Select ES1688/ES1788 AudioDrive 1.02 as the driver and
select OK. The following message appears:

Chapter 7. Installing Software 223

Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

The required esfm.dll driver is already on the system.

Do you want to use the current drive or install a new driver?

5 Click on New.
6 Select the ESS Base I/O address, DMA channel, and interrupt
level from the list of values.
Default Settings
Select the default setting for most applications:
I/O address 220
Interrupt 5
DMA channel 1
Since the ThinkPad 760EL does not support connecting to
an external MIDI device, select the following value in the
next field:
MPU401 I/O Address Disable

7 Select OK.
8 When the installation program prompts you, restart Windows NT
to make the change effective.

Changing the Default Setting

If you need to change the default setting of ESS audio resources
such as an interrupt level, DMA channel, or I/O base address, make
sure that the selected values match with the ones set by the
ThinkPad Features program. ThinkPad Feature program allows you
to set the following alternative value for each resources:
Base I/O Address 220 or 240 (220 is a default value)
Interrupt 5, 7, or 10 (5 is a default value)
DMA channel 1 or 0 (1 is a default value)

To change the default setting, do the following:

1 Start the ThinkPad Feature program, and change the default
settings.
2 Shut down and restart Windows NT.
3 Open the Windows NT Control Panel and click on Drivers.

224 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

4 Click on Setup..., and change the interrupt level and DMA

channel; then click on OK.
5 If the base I/O address is also changed by the ThinkPad
Feature program, the ESS Audio Configuration Panel warns you
that you need to change the base I/O address also. Set the
value you specified in the ThinkPad Features program.
6 Shutdown and restart Windows NT to make the changes
effective.

Playback and Recording

You may be able to record or play back the WAVE file or play back
MIDI sounds using Sound Recorder or Media Player, available in
the Accessories group. For more information, refer to Microsoft
Windows NT Workstation System Guide.

Installing the ThinkPad PCI-IDE Driver for Windows NT

To install the ThinkPad PCI-IDE device driver:

1 Close any running applications; then from the Program

Manager, double-click on Windows NT Setup in the Main
group.

2 Select Options and then Add\Remove SCSI Adapters from

the menu bar.

3 From the SCSI Adapter Setup dialog box, click on Add... to

add a new driver.
A message box explains how to recover from a bad
installation.

4 Select the OK button.

The Select SCSI Adapter Option dialog box appears.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 225

Installing Windows NT Workstation Software

Note:
If the installation files are located
5 Select Other (Requires a disk from a hardware
elsewhere, specify the path to these
manufacturer) from the Adapter: list box.
files in the text box. The Insert Diskette dialog box appears.

6 Insert the Utility Diskette into the diskette drive, and press
Enter.
The Select OEM Option dialog box appears.

7 Select ThinkPad PIIX IDE Driver and click on OK .

The Select SCSI Adapter Option dialog box reappears with
“ThinkPad PIIX IDE Driver” appearing in the Adapter: list box.

8 Click on Install.
The Windows NT Setup dialog box prompts you for the path of
the installation files.

9 Click on Continue.
If the installation was successful, the SCSI Adapter Setup
dialog box reappears, and ThinkPad PIIX IDE Driver is listed.

10 Select Close to exit SCSI Adapter Setup, exit Windows NT

Setup, and restart the computer when prompted.

After the installation, the PIIXIDE.SYS file is stored in the c:\<Win NT

directory>\System32\Drivers directory.

226 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems

Computer problems can be caused by software, hardware, or both.

You can diagnose and solve many problems with the assistance of
the self-tests and system programs contained in Easy-Setup. If a
hardware problem is detected by the self-tests, an error message is
displayed.

The system programs can identify a problem or provide information

for the service representative. Make a note of all error codes and
give them to the service representative when you call for service. If
the system programs cannot be loaded, the troubleshooting charts
and other information will help you determine what corrective action
to take.

Important

Use this chapter to test only IBM products. Non-IBM products

can cause misleading error information or incorrect computer
responses. When testing non-IBM products, refer to the
instructions supplied with those products.

Common Problems and Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . 229

Common Problems and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Frequently Asked Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Testing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Error Codes and Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
LCD Blank or Power-On Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Other General Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Battery Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
CD-ROM Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Diskette Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Enhanced Video/MPEG Feature Problems . . . . . . . . . . 246
Docking Station Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
External Monitor Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Television Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Suspend and Hibernation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Infrared Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 227

Troubleshooting

Keyboard, External Numeric Keypad, and Pointing Device

Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Mwave DSP Feature Problems (Audio and Telephony) . . . 252
Option Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Getting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Listing Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Recording Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Using the HelpWare Support Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Purchasing Additional HelpWare Services . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Custom Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Obtaining IBM Operating System Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 265
About Your Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

228 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Common Problems and Frequently Asked Questions

This section provides:
Common problems and their corresponding actions.
Frequently asked questions and their answers.

Common Problems and Actions

Problem Action
My modem application does not Verify that:
work with the Mwave modem.
You have started the Mwave modem as following:
– For OS/2:
1. Open the Mwave ThinkPad folder.
2. Double-click on the Mwave Modem icon.
The Mwave modem starts automatically.
– For DOS:
1. Type FASTCFG at the DOS prompt and press Enter.
The FASTCFG utility opens.
2. Select Advanced Modem; then select OK.
The Mwave modem starts automatically.
– For Windows, the Mwave modem starts automatically when you
start Windows.
Your application is using COM2 as a communication port. COM2 is
assigned to the Mwave modem as a default.
Your application's modem type is set to one of the following:
– Mwave modem
– Generic Hayes**-type modem
– Hayes SmartModem 2400
– Hayes modem
– Hayes-compatible modem
For more information:
– For OS/2 or Windows, double-click on the Read Me icon in the
Mwave ThinkPad window.
– For DOS, see the README.TXT file in the MWD subdirectory.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 229

Troubleshooting

Problem Action
My modem application does not If the PC Card Director shows the PC Card modem status “Ready,” add
work with the PC Card modem. the following option switch in the CONFIG.SYS file:
For DOS:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS14.SYS /IO =x (or /IO1=x)
For OS/2:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\IBM2SS14.SYS /IO =x (or /IO1=x)
Note: x shows the PC Card slot number (1 for upper slot, 2 for lower
slot, or 12 for both slots) on the computer and “/IO1=” shows the slot
number for a docking station or port replicator that is attached to the
computer.
My PC Card modem does not Your computer is equipped with a built-in Mwave modem. If you want to
work. use the PC Card modem instead of the Mwave modem, you need to
release a communications port (COM port) for the PC Card modem. Do
the following:
For OS/2 or Windows, start the ThinkPad Features program and
release a COM port for your PC Card modem by:
– Disabling the infrared device by clicking on the

Infrared ( ) icon.
– Disabling the internal modem by clicking on the
Modem ( ) icon.
– Changing the COM port for the internal modem from COM2 to
COM1.
See page 35 to use the ThinkPad Features program.
For DOS, use the PS2 command to disable the telephony function or
infrared port and to release a COM port for the PC Card modem.
For more information or the latest tips, refer to:
– PC Card problems on page 254
– READ.ME file and PCMCIA.CRD file in the THINKPAD
subdirectory of the computer
I cannot use PC Cards other than If you do not have the PC Card device driver for OS/2 but you have one
IBM ones in the OS/2 Warp for DOS, your PC Card may run in the VDM (virtual DOS machine)
environment. environment. Refer to “Virtual Card Services for OS/2” on page 290 for
setting the VDM and the sample configuration files on the PC Card
Director Diskette for OS/2 and Windows 95. (If the PC Card Director
Diskette for OS/2 and Windows 95 did not come with the computer, create
it using the Diskette Factory program.)

230 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
My computer does not show as Performance varies depending on your hardware and software
good performance as I expected. configurations such as memory size, swapper file size, or smart drive
settings.
Also, close any windows you are not using; for example, when there is no
CD in the CD-ROM drive, make sure the Media Player window is closed.
Error 2XX appears (memory error). Make sure your memory card is correctly installed. (See page 125.)
A memory shortage or memory When you are using DOS, it is recommended that you use the DOS
error occurs. command MEM /C to review your DOS memory usage occasionally.
And then:
– Unload any unnecessary drivers from the CONFIG.SYS file. (For
example, unload printer drivers if you do not use a printer.)
– Reconfigure the UMB (upper memory block) using the DEVICEHIGH
statement.
– Use the multiple configuration setup for DOS (refer to the
documents supplied with DOS).
When you are using Windows:
– Try the same actions as described for DOS.
– Unload any unnecessary programs from the WIN.INI file (for
example, FUELWIN for AC operations, LRGPTR for large pointer,
and so on).
The external monitor screen is Do the following:
blank.
Press Fn+F7.
Make sure the display output type parameter of the ThinkPad Features

program is set to CRT ( ) or Both ( ).

In the ThinkPad Features program, set the computer not to enter
suspend mode when the LCD is closed.
The computer does not resume The computer automatically enters suspend or hibernation mode when the
from suspend mode, or the battery pack is empty. Do one of the following:
suspend indicator stays on and the
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one and then press Fn.
computer does not work.
Connect the AC Adapter to the computer.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 231

Troubleshooting

Problem Action
The computer does not enter Verify that:
suspend or hibernation mode.
If the computer is attached to a Dock I, suspend mode is disabled.
If the computer is attached to a Dock II or SelectaDock Docking
System, open the Docking Control utility and verify suspend and
hibernation are not disabled. If either is disabled, enable it.
If you are using the AC Adapter and the computer is communicating,
suspend and hibernation modes are disabled. (See page 96.)
When using Windows, the pointer Make sure you have installed Windows with the APM option by following
does not move after normal the procedures on page 190.
operation is resumed from one of
the power-saving modes.

Frequently Asked Questions and Answers

Question Answer
How can I expand my hard disk Most of the preloaded applications provide a way to be uninstalled and
space? free hard disk space. Check whether the application you want to
delete has its own delete icon.
After creating all the necessary drivers diskettes using the Diskette
Factory, you can delete the diskette files.
How can I expand my memory? See answers to memory questions on page 231.
How can I get diskettes for You can create the operating systems diskettes or device driver diskettes
operating systems or device by using the Diskette Factory program or any other backup programs. If
drivers? you cannot use the Diskette Factory program, do the following:
In the U.S., access the IBM PC Company BBS to get the latest
versions of device driver diskettes.
Purchase the operating system diskettes or device driver diskettes.
Contact your IBM dealer or IBM marketing representative. (See page
259 for IBM HelpWare information.)
How can I resolve any resource See Appendix A to get information about any hardware resources already
conflicts (for IRQ, COM port, and used by devices in the computer.
other settings) that have occurred
after installing a new option or a
new application?

232 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Testing the Computer

The following shows a basic way to test the computer:
1 Turn on the computer.
The power-on self-test (POST) runs automatically. If the test
ends without detecting an error, one of the following occurs:
The operating system or application screen appears.
A password prompt appears on the screen, if a password
has been set. Type the correct password and press Enter.
The following Diskette and F1 prompt appears:

F1

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

This means no operating system is installed in your

computer. Install it now.
Did one of these screens appear?
Yes Turn off the computer and continue with step 2.
No Go to page 235.
2 Make sure the speaker volume control is in its middle position.
3 Press and hold F1; then turn on the computer to start
Easy-Setup. Hold F1 until the following Easy-Setup menu
appears:

Easy-Setup

Config Date/Time Password Start up Test

BIOS part number,..Date nnnnnnn 12/31/96

System-unit serial number nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
System board serial number nnnnnnnnnnn
Restart Microprocessor Pentium( )Process
**

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 233

Troubleshooting

4 Did the Easy-Setup menu appear on the screen?

Note: Yes The computer has successfully completed the POST
During the test, do not touch the (internal tests), and the system programs have been loaded.
keyboard or the pointing device. To start the test programs, select the Test icon; then select
the Start icon or press Enter.

Start Restart

1 1 1
SystemBoard Memory Display HDD-1 FDD-1 PCMCIA-1 Parallel

1 2
Serial DSP CDROM-1 Infrared Audio HDD-2

3 2 2 2 4
HDD-3 FDD-2 PCMCIA-2 CDROM-2 HDD-4

Exit

If the computer did not beep, the speaker is not working

correctly. Check that the speaker volume control (see page 21
for the location) is in its middle position. If you are not sure
about the beep, turn off the computer; then turn it on again and
repeat step 3 on page 233. If a problem persists, have the
computer serviced.
If you cannot go beyond the first screen, have the computer
serviced.
If an error is detected, the character X appears at the left of the
affected device, and an error code appears below it. Record the
error code and have the computer serviced.
If the test does not find a problem but one persists, find the
problem in the troubleshooting charts on page 235.
No Return to step 3 on page 233 and start Easy-Setup again.
If you still cannot start Easy-Setup, find the problem in the
troubleshooting charts starting on page 235.

234 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Charts
In the charts, x can be any character.

Error Codes and Screen Messages

Screen Message and Its
Action
Meaning
I9990301 The computer cannot find the startup drive. Do the following:
I9990302
1. Turn off the computer.
I9990305
2. Press and hold F1; then turn on the computer to start Easy-Setup. Hold F1
(Incorrect connection of
until the Easy-Setup menu appears.
the hard disk drive can
cause these error codes 3. Select the Start up icon. If you are unable to set the startup sequence,
to appear.) have the computer serviced.
4. Check the list of devices on the startup sequence box. Is the default drive
listed in the startup sequence box?
Yes Exit this screen, and turn off the computer.
No Select the Reset icon.
5. Is an operating system installed?
Yes Go to step 7.
No Install operating system in your computer.
6. After the operating system is installed, turn off the computer.
7. Turn on the computer.
If the same screen message appears, have the computer serviced.
I99xxxxx Have the computer serviced.
(Except the above
I999030x errors)
111 If you are using a port replicator or a docking station, disconnect it; then
reconnect it.
(Docking station error)
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 235

Troubleshooting

Screen Message and Its

Action
Meaning
158 A hard disk drive without a hard disk password is installed when a supervisor
password is set.
(Supervisor password
error) The location of the hard disk drive can be one of the following: the main hard
disk drive bay of the computer, the UltraBay of the computer, or the UltraBay of
the SelectaDock Docking System attached to the computer.
To solve the problem, do the following:
1. Make sure the hard disk drive without a hard disk password is installed in
the main hard disk drive bay of the computer.
If the hard disk drive has been in the UltraBay of the SelectaDock Docking
System, turn off the computer and reinstall the hard disk drive in the main
hard disk drive bay.
2. Press Enter.
3. Type your supervisor password at the power-on password prompt.
If an error 158 screen appears, press Enter to proceed to the Easy-Setup
password screen.
4. Select the Supervisor icon; then press Enter.
The same password as the supervisor password is set for the hard disk
password on the hard disk drive.
5. Turn off the computer.
159 The hard disk password differs from the supervisor password.
(Supervisor password The location of the hard disk drive can be one of the following: the main hard
error) disk drive bay of the computer, the UltraBay of the computer, or the UltraBay of
the SelectaDock Docking System attached to the computer.
To solve the problem, do the following:
1. Make sure the hard disk drive with a hard disk drive password different from
the supervisor password is installed in the main hard disk drive bay of the
computer.
If the hard disk drive has been in the UltraBay of the SelectaDock Docking
System, turn off the computer and reinstall it in the main hard disk drive bay.
2. Turn off the computer; then turn it on again.
3. Change the hard disk password to the supervisor password at the hard disk
password prompt.

236 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Screen Message and Its

Action
Meaning
16x or 17x Follow the instructions on the screen.
(Undefined date or
configuration error)
174 There is a device configuration error.
(Device configuration Check that the hard disk drive and the device in the UltraBay are installed firmly
error) in the connectors.
184 The entered password is invalid. Turn off the computer and wait at least 5
seconds; then turn it on again and type the correct password.
(Invalid password error)
190 The computer has turned off because of a critical low-battery condition.
(Critical low-battery error) Connect the AC Adapter to the computer and charge the battery pack, or
replace the battery pack with the fully charged one.
195 The system configuration before and after hibernation mode differs, and the
computer cannot resume normal operation.
(Hibernation error)
Change the system configuration to what it was before the computer entered
hibernation mode.
If the memory size is changed, re-create the hibernation file (see page 98).
196 The computer cannot read the hibernation file.
(Hibernation error) Have the computer serviced.
2xx Verify that the DIMM option is correctly installed.
(Memory error)

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 237

Troubleshooting

Screen Message and Its

Action
Meaning
30x Verify that nothing is put on the system keyboard or the external keyboard.
Turn off the computer and all attached devices. Turn on the computer first; then
(Keyboard error)
turn on the attached devices.
If there is still a problem, do the following:
If the computer has an external keyboard connected, do the following:
– Turn off the computer and disconnect the external keyboard; then turn
on the computer. If no error occurred, your external keyboard might be
damaged. Have the external keyboard serviced.
– Verify that the external keyboard is connected to the correct side of the
keyboard/mouse connector (see page 154).
– Verify that the keyboard/mouse connector is correctly connected to the
computer.
If the preceding items are correct, disconnect the keyboard/mouse connector
from the computer and verify that the operation of the system keyboard is
correct. If the system keyboard works correctly, have the keyboard/mouse
connector or the external keyboard serviced.
Test the computer by selecting the Start icon in the Test menu of
Easy-Setup.
– If the computer stops during testing and does not continue, have the
computer serviced.
Diskette and F1 prompt. Verify that the hard disk drive is correctly installed. Or, verify that the
self-starting diskette is inserted correctly (with the label up and metal-shutter end
first) in the diskette drive.
If so, press F1. If both prompts remain, have the computer serviced.
F1

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

Error 163 appears with The date and time screen appears when neither the date nor the time is set in
the date and time screen. the computer.

1996 .12.31
Set the date and time by typing or clicking on the or to set the numbers;
Year Month Day then click on the OK button.
23:59:59
Hour Month Second

238 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Screen Message and Its

Action
Meaning
Power-on password A power-on or supervisor password was set. To use the computer, type the
prompt. correct password and press Enter (see page 102).
If the power-on password is not accepted, a supervisor password might have
been set. Type the supervisor password and press Enter.
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.

Hard disk password A hard disk password was set. To use the computer, type the correct password
prompt. and press Enter (see page 102).
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.

Test menu. Select the Start icon and follow the instructions to test your system.

Start Restart
If you cannot go beyond the Test screen, have the computer serviced.
SystemBoard Memory Display HDD-1 FDD-1 PCMCIA-1 Parallel
If the computer stops during testing and does not continue, have the
Serial DSP CDROM Infrared Audio HDD-3 computer serviced.
HDD-2 FDD-2 PCMCIA-2
If testing does not find a problem but one persists, find the problem in “What
Exit If Testing Cannot Find the Problem?” on page 243.
If the test ends with an error, make a note of the error code and have the
computer serviced.
POST error prompt. An error was found during the POST. Press Enter; then select Start from the
test menu to run the test.

ERROR If the test ends with an error, make a note of the error code and have the
computer serviced.
OK Cancel

Error prompt. Turn off the computer and start Easy-Setup; then select Test to test the
computer.
If the test ends with an error, make a note of the error code and have the
computer serviced.
You can start the operating system by pressing F1 instead and ignore the error.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 239

Troubleshooting

Screen Message and Its

Action
Meaning
DOS screen looks When you use a DOS application that supports only VGA mode (640-by-480
smaller. resolution) with your computer, the screen image might look slightly distorted or
might appear smaller than the display size. This is to maintain compatibility with
DOS applications. To expand the screen image to the same size as the actual
640 x 480 screen, start the ThinkPad Features program and click on the Display button
( ); then select the screen expansion function. (However, the image may
look slightly distorted.)
A screen or message that Turn off the computer and start Easy-Setup; then select Test to test the
is not listed. computer.
If the test ends with an error, make a note of the error code and have the
computer serviced.
If you cannot start Easy-Setup, have the computer serviced.

LCD Blank or Power-On Problems

Problem Action
The screen is blank and Verify that:
there are no beeps.
The battery pack is correctly installed.
Note: If you are not sure The AC Adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is
about the beeps, turn the plugged into a working electrical outlet.
computer off; then turn it The computer power is on. (Turn on the power switch again for verification.)
on again, and listen to the
If the preceding items are correct and the screen remains blank, have the
beeps.
computer serviced.
The screen is blank and If a power-on password is set, press any key to display a power-on password
there is one beep. prompt and then type the correct password and press Enter (see page 102).
Note: If you are using an If a power-on password is not set, verify that the brightness control on the
external monitor, go to computer is correctly adjusted. If the preceding items are correct and the
“External Monitor screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.
Problems” on page 247.
The screen is blank and Have the computer serviced.
there is a continuous
beep, or two or more
beeps.
Only the cursor appears. Reinstall your operating system and turn on the computer.
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.

240 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
xxxxx KB OK appears Have the computer serviced.
and the computer halts.
The screen is unreadable Verify that:
or distorted.
The ThinkPad display driver is installed correctly (refer to the Chapter 7 for
installation instructions).
The refresh rate settings in the ThinkPad Features program's display setup
screen (under the Advanced... button) are set to your display resolution and
color type.
Incorrect characters Verify that operating systems and application programs have been installed and
appear on the screen. configured correctly.
If so, have the computer serviced.
The screen stays on Press the Power Shutdown switch on the rear of the computer with the tip of a
although the power switch pen to turn off the computer; then turn the computer on again.
is turned off.
The computer goes into Verify that:
suspend mode
The battery pack is charged.
immediately after the
The keyboard is firmly closed.
POST. (The suspend
The environmental temperature is within the acceptable range. Refer to
lamp turns on.)
Appendix C, “Features and Specifications” on page 291.
If the preceding items are correct, have the computer serviced.
Error 190 appears and the The battery pack is low in power. Connect the AC Adapter to the computer, or
computer immediately replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
turns off.
Missing, discolored, or The computer LCD contains more than 1,440,000 thin-film transistors (TFTs). A
bright dots appear on the small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen is an intrinsic
screen at all times. (TFT characteristic of TFT LCD technology and is not an LCD defect.
model only.)

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 241

Troubleshooting

Other General Problems

Problem Cause or Action
The computer locks up or When you turn on the computer with OS/2 Warp installed, make sure no
does not accept any input. compact disc (CD) is in the CD-ROM drive.
Some CDs cause the computer to lock up and accept no input when the
computer is turned on with the CD installed. If the computer locks up with
the CD installed in the CD-ROM drive, remove the CD, turn off the
computer, and turn the computer on again.
To turn the computer off, press the Power Shutdown switch on the rear of
the computer with the tip of a pen to turn off the computer; then turn the
computer on again.
The computer enters The computer enters suspend mode automatically when the processor
suspend mode temperature is higher than a certain degree. This is not a defect.
automatically.
Performance degrades Processor speed may decrease if the computer is used under the following
when the computer is conditions, for thermal protection. This is not a defect.
getting hot during use.
The computer is used in a high-temperature environment. (See
Appendix C.)
The computer is getting hot because it is maintaining operations that require
high power consumption for a long time.
The computer has Have the computer serviced.
problems such as a
broken keylock or a
defective indicator lamp.
The computer does not If the suspend lamp is turned on, connect the AC Adapter or install a fully
turn off with the power charged battery pack in the computer; then resume operations.
switch.
If there is still a problem, press the Power Shutdown switch on the rear of the
computer with the tip of a pen to turn off the computer.
The computer does not Check that the startup sequence in Easy-Setup is set to start the computer from
start from a diskette. the diskette drive (see page 38).
The keyboard cannot be Check that:
opened.
A Kensington lock or compatible lock is not in use.
The security latch at the right side of the computer is unlocked. (See step 2
on page 7.)
Note: Slide the keyboard latches toward the front to open the keyboard.

242 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem?

If the test programs do not find the problem, use these troubleshooting charts:

Battery Power Problems

Problem Action
When you are using OS/2 Discharge the battery pack; then recharge it using the Fuel-gauge program (see
or Windows, the message, page 90).
“Please discharge battery”
appears on the screen.
The battery status The over-current protection device inside the battery pack has been activated.
indicator has turned off Wait for several hours and try to use it again. If there is still a problem, replace
although a battery pack is the battery pack or have the computer serviced.
installed in the computer.
The battery pack cannot The battery pack might be over-discharged.
be fully charged in 3
1. Turn off the computer.
hours by the power-off
2. Make sure that the over-discharged battery pack is in the computer.
charging method.
3. Connect the AC Adapter to the computer and let it charge.
If the battery pack cannot be fully charged in 24 hours, use a new battery pack.
If a Quick Charger (available as an option) is available, use it to charge the
over-discharged battery pack.
The battery operating time Repeat discharging and charging of the battery pack at least three times.
indicated by the
Fuel-Gauge program or
the battery status indicator
is much longer or shorter
than the actual operating
time.
The operating time for a Repeat discharging and charging of the battery pack three to six times. If there
fully charged battery pack is still a problem, use a new battery pack.
becomes shorter.
The computer does not The over-current protective function in the battery pack might be activated. Turn
operate with a fully off the computer for 1 minute to reset the over-current protective function, and
charged battery pack then turn it back on again.
installed.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 243

Troubleshooting

CD-ROM Drive Problems

Problem Action
The CD-ROM will not Verify that:
operate.
The computer power is turned on and a compact disc is set in the CD-ROM
tray.
The CD-ROM drive connector is firmly attached to the computer.
The CD-ROM drive tray is firmly closed.
The device drivers have been installed correctly (see page 176 for OS/2 or
page 186 for DOS.)
When you use Windows or DOS, the device driver and support software
have been copied to the correct directory on the hard disk. (See page 186.)
When you use DOS, the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files have the
correct statements (see page 186).
When you use DOS, refer to your DOS documentation and check the
LASTDRIVE statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. (It is recommended to set
the LASTDRIVE to Z.)
When you use OS/2, Line/CD is selected as the auxiliary source in the
Mwave Auxiliary Control window. (See page 53.)
If you attach a docking station to the computer and the CD-ROM drive in the
docking station does not work, make sure that the secondary IDE device in
the docking station is enabled by the ThinkPad Features program:
1. Start the ThinkPad Features program.

2. Click on the Docking Station ( ) icon.

3. Make sure you have checked Enable secondary IDE device.
See page 186 for information about the CD-ROM software parameter in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
The CD-ROM tray does Insert a pin into the CD-ROM emergency eject hole to eject the CD-ROM tray.
not open with the (See page 20.)
CD-ROM eject button.

244 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
The compact disc cannot Verify that:
be read.
The compact disc is not dirty. Clean it with a CD-ROM cleaner kit.
The compact disc is not defective. Try another compact disc.
The compact disc is placed in the tray with the label side up.
The compact disc is a compatible format as follows:
– Music CDs
– CD-ROM or CD-ROM XA
– Multisession photo CDs
– Video CDs and CD-i movies (Windows 95 does not support CD-i
movies.)
If the problem persists, see information about SMARTDRV on page 186.

Diskette Drive Problems

Problem Action
The diskette drive in use If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
icon stays on. – The internal or externally attached diskette drive connector is firmly
attached to the computer.
– The diskette contains the necessary files to start the system.
– There is nothing wrong with your application program.
– There is nothing wrong with the diskette. Try a backup copy if you have
one.
– The diskette is inserted correctly (label up and metal-shutter end first) in
the diskette drive.
If the preceding items are correct, have the computer serviced.
If there is no diskette in the drive, have the computer serviced.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 245

Troubleshooting

Enhanced Video/MPEG Feature Problems

Problem Cause and Action
The Enhanced Video Verify the Enhanced Video is enabled and no resource conflicts (IRQ or I/O
function or the MPEG address) exist by doing the following:
function does not work.
1. Select the Enhanced Video ( ) icon in the ThinkPad Features
program.
2. Click on Advanced..., and make sure at least one IRQ is assigned for
the PCI devices.
If you find any conflicts with other devices, change the value to avoid
any conflicts (see page 267).
The MPEG playback and the video capture functions use the same
hardware resources. Only one of the two functions can be used at the
same time. For the same reason, two MPEG functions cannot be used at
the same time.

Docking Station Problems

Problem Action
SCSI devices in the Dock Verify that:
I or Dock II do not work.
SCSI devices are installed correctly. (Refer to the user's guide for Dock I or
II.)
IRQ level for the SCSI controller does not conflict with the system resource.
– To change the SCSI IRQ, refer to the user's guide for Dock I or II.

– To change the system resource, click on the Docking Station ( )

icon in the ThinkPad Features program and click on Advanced and PCI
device setup; then change the IRQ level.
The IDE CD-ROM drive or Verify that a secondary IDE device in the docking station does not conflict with
hard disk drive in the the system resource:
docking station
1. Start the ThinkPad Features program.
(SelectaDock Docking
System, Dock I, or Dock 2. Click on the Docking Station ( ) icon and put a check mark by Enable
II) does not work. secondary IDE device.

246 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

External Monitor Problems

Problem Action
The screen is blank. Verify that:
The power cord for the external monitor is plugged into a working electrical
outlet and into the external monitor.
The external monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls
are adjusted.
The signal cable for the external monitor is plugged into the external-monitor
connector on the computer. Some signal cables might not fit into the
external-monitor connector because of the connector type.

The external monitor (CRT or Both ) is selected as the display

device using the Fn key function (see page 26) or the ThinkPad Features
program (see page 35).
After verifying the preceding items, turn off the computer; then turn it on.
If the external monitor remains blank, run the display tests described in the
instructions supplied with the external monitor. If the tests show the external
display is OK, have the computer serviced.
You cannot set the higher Verify that:
resolution for the external
1. The ThinkPad display driver is installed correctly. If you are not sure,
monitor.
reinstall the display driver referring to Chapter 7.
2. An appropriate monitor type is selected. See the ThinkPad Features
program's advanced setup window.
3. An appropriate refresh rate is selected. See the ThinkPad Features
program.
The screen is unreadable Verify that:
or distorted.
The ThinkPad display driver is installed correctly (see Chapter 7).
The device setup parameters (resolution and refresh rate) in the display
setting screen (click on the Display ( ) icon in the ThinkPad Features
program) are set to your display resolution and color type (see page 40).
To change or set up the external monitor, see “Using the LCD and an External
Monitor” on page 40.
If these are correct, run the tests described in the instructions supplied with the
external monitor. If the tests show the external display is OK, have the
computer serviced.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 247

Troubleshooting

Problem Action
(For the Enhanced video When you attach an external monitor to the Enhanced Video model computer
model:) Interference and set the following video modes, you might see some interference or low
occurs in the overlay screen resolution in the overlay window of the external monitor:
window.
800×600 (resolution) and 16,777,216 (color depth)
1024×768 and 256
1024×768 and 65,536
1280×1024 and 256
To fix this, change the following settings using the ThinkPad Features program:
1. Change the refresh rate; then check whether the monitor screen is
corrected. If the problem persists, go to step 2.
2. Change the color depth. Restart the computer; then check whether the
monitor screen is corrected. If the problem persists, go to step 3.
3. Change the screen resolution. Restart the computer; then check whether
the monitor screen is corrected.
Wrong characters appear Verify that the operating systems and application programs have been installed
on the screen. and configured correctly.
If so, have the computer serviced.

Television Problems
Problem Action
The screen is blank. Even if you selected television output, whenever you turn on the computer, its
output is always displayed first on the LCD. Use the Fn+F7 keys to display
output on the television.

248 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Suspend and Hibernation Problems

Problem Action
When you use Windows When you use Windows 95, the Windows 95 generic CD-ROM driver accesses
95, the computer does not the internal CD-ROM drive every 3 seconds to see if a CD-ROM is inserted in
enter suspend mode by the CD-ROM drive. This prevents a ThinkPad 760ED from entering suspend
timer. mode by the timer suspend function even if there is no actual system activity for
a certain period.
To stop this auto-detect function and enable the timer suspend function, do the
following:
1. Open My Computer.
2. Open Control Panel; then open System.
3. Click on the Device Manager tab.
4. Click on the + mark of CD-ROM.
5. Double-click on the CD-ROM name that appears.
6. Click on the Setting tab.
7. Remove the check mark from Auto insertion notification.
Windows 95 will no longer detect CD-ROM insertion automatically.

The computer does not Did you create the hibernation file?
enter hibernation mode
You must create the hibernation file before entering hibernation mode (see
with the Fn+F12 key
page 98).
combination.
Are you using PC Cards?
If you are using one of the IBM communication PC Cards listed in the
“Considerations for Hibernation Mode” on page 98, the computer cannot
enter hibernation mode.
To enter hibernation mode, stop the communication program, and then
remove the PC Card or turn off the power to the PC Card slot using the PC
Card Director.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 249

Troubleshooting

Infrared Communication Problems

Problem Action
The computer cannot Verify that:
communicate with other
Power is supplied to the infrared port by the ThinkPad Features program
devices using the infrared
port on the computer. (click on the Infrared ( ) icon).
The infrared function is enabled and other choices are set correctly in

ThinkPad Features program (click on the Infrared ( ) icon in the

ThinkPad Features program).
The communicating device is using an equivalent communication speed
(see page 50).
The infrared ports are cleaned and do not have any spots.
No cable or electrical device is between the computer and the
communicating device.
The distance and angle between the computer and the communicating
device are correct.
The communicating distance might need to be less if:
– The other system is not the same model as your computer.
– There is interference from ambient light. It is recommended that you do
not use infrared communication in bright sunshine or artificial light
conditions.
– The infrared port is not directly facing the other communicating port.
Wireless headphones that use infrared may interfere with infrared
communications. You might hear noise through the headphones, or the
computer might not be able to communicate with other devices through the
infrared port.
Communication can be affected by the light from the LCD on the computer.
To avoid this, open the LCD to a wide angle.
You need to run the same communication application on both computers to
communicate between your computer and another computer device. Refer
to the application manuals for more information.
When using applications that use a conventional serial port and serial cable
to exchange data, your computer infrared ports are used as a replacement
for the serial port and cable. In this case, ThinkPad mode cannot be used.
Incorrect data is sent Verify that:
between the computer
The distance and angle between the devices are correct.
and device.
The communicating device is using an equivalent communication speed.
There is no device radiating infrared rays, such as remote-controlled devices
or wireless headphones, near the computer or device.
Direct sunlight or fluorescent lamps are not near the computer or device.

250 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Keyboard, External Numeric Keypad, and Pointing Device Problems

Problem Action
All or some keys on the If the problem occurs immediately after the computer returns to normal
system keyboard do not operation from suspend mode, enter the power-on password. If a power-on
work. password is set, you must enter the password.
If the external keyboard is connected, the numeric keypad on the system
keyboard will not work.
If the external numeric keypad or the mouse is connected:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Remove the external numeric keypad or the mouse.
3. Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again.
If the keyboard problem is resolved, check the connection of the external
numeric keypad, external keyboard, or the mouse. If there is still a problem,
have the computer serviced.
The pointer drifts when Drifting is a characteristic of the TrackPoint III and is not a defect. The drifting
the computer is turned on occurs for several seconds under the following conditions:
or after resuming normal
When the computer is turned on.
operation.
When resuming normal operation.
—or—
When the TrackPoint III is pressed for a long period of time.
During computer
When the environmental temperature changes.
operation, the pointer
drifts when not using the
TrackPoint III.
The mouse or pointing Verify that the mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the
device does not work. computer.
Try using the TrackPoint III. If the TrackPoint III works, suspect the
externally attached pointing device.
If you are using Windows 3.11, make sure Computer is set as MS-DOS
System with APM. See page 190.
If you are using a mouse that is not compatible with the IBM PS/2 mouse,
disable the TrackPoint III using the ThinkPad Features program.
1. For OS/2 and Windows, see page 153 to disable the TrackPoint III.
2. For DOS, use the PS2 command.
All or some keys on the Verify that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer.
external numeric keypad
do not work.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 251

Troubleshooting

Problem Action
All or some keys on the To use an external keyboard, you need to attach the keyboard/mouse connector
external keyboard do not to the computer. Verify that:
work.
The keyboard/mouse connector is correctly connected to the computer.
The keyboard connector is connected to the correct side of the
keyboard/mouse connector.
If the preceding items are correct, disconnect the keyboard/mouse connector
from the computer and verify that the operation of the system keyboard is
correct. If the system keyboard works, have the keyboard/mouse connector or
the external keyboard serviced.
A number appears when The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press and hold Shift; then press
you type an alphabetic NumLk.
character.

Mwave DSP Feature Problems (Audio and Telephony)

Problem Cause and Action
Sound Blaster support This is probably because Mwave is being used for other functions, such as the
cannot be enabled. modem. Type FASTCFG at the command prompt and press Enter; then select
Games at the utility window.
DOS games work slowly Some DOS games run slower in a Windows DOS session than in native DOS.
in a Windows session. Check the documentation of your game for special instructions about improving
performance. Configure your computer to use the VGA display driver rather
than a higher resolution or less efficient driver. Determine if your game allows
you to turn off “background music” and only play special effects.
The modem does not Verify that:
work correctly.
If you are using OS/2 or DOS, you have started the Mwave modem (see
page 57).
The modem/fax port is securely installed.
The modem is correctly identified in your communication program.
This is often caused by a conflict between communication port addresses or
interrupt assignments, or both.
For more details, see also modem problems on page 229.
A modem error occurred. Refer to the Mwave command reference in the Mwave ThinkPad window.
A modem application is Verify that:
not working.
You did not close the modem window instead of minimizing it.
The modem is set to support the speed you are trying to use.

252 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Problem Cause and Action

The computer cannot Verify that the telephone plug is correctly attached (see page 149).
receive incoming calls
from the speaker phone or
the modem.
Voice quality over the Due to limitations of the Mwave DSP hardware, voice quality that is transmitted
Voice Over Data and received over the Voice Over Data communication is not as good as normal
communication is not as telephone communication. (Momentary voice discontinuity and delay or
good as expected. distortion or both may be expected.)
Other problems. The following is a list of failures that can cause other problems:
A compatibility problem exists between the Mwave feature and one or more
other adapter cards in the docking station attached to the computer.
To isolate a compatibility problem, remove other adapter cards from your
docking station and rerun the diagnostics while these adapters are removed.
The telephone cable configuration is not correct for your application.
The telephone cable is defective.
The telephone is defective.
The audio cable configuration is not correct for your application.
The audio cable is defective.
The audio equipment is defective.

Option Problems
Problem Action
An IBM option that was Verify that:
just installed does not
The option is designed for the IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL
work.
computer.
The option has been installed correctly by following the instructions supplied
with the option or this book.
Other installed options or cables are not loose.
No I/O address or interrupt level (IRQ) conflict has occurred. To see the
system resource status, start the ThinkPad Features program and click the
device icon. (The Advanced.. button is available for some devices.)
If the test programs for the option did not find the problem, have the computer
and option serviced, or see Appendix A.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 253

Troubleshooting

Problem Action
An IBM option that used Verify that:
to work no longer works.
All the option hardware and cable connections are securely connected.
If the option came with its own test instructions, use those instructions to
test the option.
System resource conflicts do not occur (see Appendix A).
If the preceding items are correct and the test programs did not find the
problem, have the computer and option serviced.
The serial port does not Ensure that serial port is enabled and set to COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 in
work.
the ThinkPad Features program (click on the Serial Port icon).

PC Card Problems
Problem Action
PC Card Director does not Verify that:
recognize your PC Card.
If you are using the EMS driver under DOS:
– You have set the correct value for the /MA=mmmm-nnnn parameter in the
Resource Map Utility. In the EMS driver, check the UMB area used for
PCMCIA under the X=mmmm-nnnn parameter; then use that range to set
the /MA parameter in the Resource Map Utility.
Your PC Card supports the PC Card Standard (1995) or PCMCIA Release
2.0 and 2.01. Refer to the manual that came with your PC Card.
If your PC Card does not support the PC Card Standard (1995) or PCMCIA
Release 2.0 and 2.01, you cannot use PC Card Director. Contact your PC
Card supplier.
Your PC Card is working by following the diagnostic instructions for your PC
Card, if any.

254 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Problem Action
The PC Card is Verify that:
recognized by PC Card
The PC Card enabler is installed.
Director, but the “Not
Ready” message is Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC Card.
shown. If you are using the EMS driver under DOS:
You have set the correct value for the /MA=mmmm-nnnn parameter in the
Resource Map Utility. In the EMS driver, check the UMB area used for
PCMCIA under the X=mmmm-nnnn parameter; then use that range to set the
/MA parameter in the Resource Map Utility. If you are using Windows, also
set the value for the EMMEXCLUDE= parameter in the SYSTEM.INI file.
The resources for the PC Card are correctly reserved.
Refer to “Checking the Allocated Resources for the PC Card” on page 288.
The PC Card is shown as Verify that:
“Ready,” but it does not
The resources reserved for the PC Card do not conflict with those for other
work correctly.
system devices.
Refer to “Avoiding System Resource Conflicts When Using PC Cards” on
page 269 or open the ThinkPad Features program to resolve a conflict.
The resources reserved for the PC Card match the settings in the
application program.
If you are using a modem card, check the COM number, I/O port address,
and IRQ level. If you are using a network card, check the I/O port address,
IRQ level, and memory window address. To check the resources assigned
to the PC Card, click on the Status button in the PC Card Director program.
If you are using an I/O PC Card, it might work if you add the following in the
CONFIG.SYS file:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS14.SYS /IO =x (or /IO1=x)
Note: x shows the PC Card slot number (1 for upper slot, 2 for lower slot,
or 12 for both slots) on the computer and “/IO1=” shows the slot number for
a docking station or port replicator that is attached to the computer.
System resource conflicts See “Avoiding System Resource Conflicts When Using PC Cards” on page 269.
occurred when using PC
Cards.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 255

Troubleshooting

Printer Problems
Problem Action
The printer does not work. Verify that:

The parallel port is enabled. (Click on the Parallel Port ( ) icon.

The printer is turned on and ready to print.
The printer signal cable is connected to the correct connector on the
computer. (For the location of the printer connector, see “parallel connector”
on page 23.)
If the preceding items are correct and the printer still does not work, run the
tests described in the printer manual. If the tests show that the printer is OK,
have the computer serviced.

Software Problems
Problem Action
An application program To determine if a problem is caused by the software, verify that:
does not work correctly.
Your computer has the minimum memory required to use the software.
Refer to the manuals supplied with the software to verify this.
The software is designed to operate with your computer and your operating
system.
Other software works correctly with your computer.
Necessary device drivers are installed (see Chapter 7.)
The software you are using works correctly with another computer.
If you have received any error messages when using the application program,
refer to the manuals supplied with the software for a description of the
messages and a solution to the problem.
If the preceding items are correct and there is still a problem, contact your IBM
authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative for help.
You cannot install OS/2 If you are using the 760EL (ESS audio model), see page 169.
Warp.

256 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Troubleshooting

Getting Service
If you need further assistance, call your IBM authorized reseller or
IBM marketing representative.

When requesting service, describe the error message or problem to

the service representative. Error messages can help identify what
service action is required and help the service representative provide
quick and efficient service.

Important
During the warranty period, you may be responsible for repair
costs if the product damage was due to misuse, accident,
modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, or
improper maintenance by you.

For your convenience, write the service phone numbers here.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 257

Getting Service

Listing Installed Options

When requesting repair service, you might need to know which
options you have in your system. Check or write the names of your
options below.

DIMM Battery Pack

(8MB, 16MB, or 32MB)
______MB Hard Disk Drive Option in the UltraBay

Internal CD-ROM Drive PC Cards

or Diskette Drive

Recording Identification Numbers

The following information is needed when requesting repair services:

ThinkPad 760E
IBM Product Name ThinkPad 760ED
ThinkPad 760EL

Machine Type

Serial Number

The machine type and serial number 1 are located on the bottom
of the computer.
The machine type has a prefix of Type.
The serial number has a prefix of S/N.

258 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Service

Using the HelpWare Support Family

IBM HelpWare is the full-service solution for IBM PC service and support,
wherever IBM products are sold and serviced. Purchasing an IBM PC
hardware product entitles you to standard, no-fee help and support during
the warranty period. If you need additional support and services, HelpWare
provides a wide variety of extended solutions that address almost any need.

Getting Help by Telephone

During the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone,
at no additional charge, through the IBM HelpWare PC Support Line.
Expert technical-support representatives are available to assist you with
questions you might have on the following:

Setting up your computer and IBM display

Installing and setting up IBM options purchased from IBM or an IBM
reseller
Using the 60-day support for the preloaded operating system
Arranging for service

Please have the following information ready when you call:

Serial numbers of your computer, display, and other components or your

proof of purchase
Description of the problem
Exact wording of any error messages
Hardware and software configuration information for your system

If possible, be at your computer when you call.

In the U.S. and Puerto Rico, call 1-800-772-2227.

In Canada, call 1-800-565-3344.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.

These services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week (excluding

some holidays).

Your HelpWare representative can also fax or mail additional technical or

product information to you, such as:

Sales information
Product brochures
Locations of IBM resellers
Services available through IBM

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 259

Getting Service

ThinkPad EasyServ
ThinkPad EasyServ is a courier repair service for IBM Mobile products in
which your ThinkPad computer will be picked up, sent to IBM for repair, and
then returned back to the location of your choice. This service is available
at no additional charge during the warranty period. Most repairs can be
made the same day the system is received at the IBM repair location.

You can arrange this service by calling the PC Support Line. Telephone
problem determination will be performed in the event the issue may be
resolved over the telephone. If the problem is not able to be resolved over
the telephone, a support representative will arrange for ThinkPad EasyServ.

You should keep your original ThinkPad shipping materials to send the
computer to the repair location. If the original shipping carton is not
available, the courier will deliver a shipping carton and return to pick up the
system for delivery to IBM. This service is available only in the U.S. and
Canada.

Getting Help Around the World

If you travel with your computer or need to move it to another country, you
can register for International Warranty Service. You will receive an
International Warranty Service Certificate that is honored worldwide,
wherever IBM or IBM resellers sell and service IBM PC products.

For more information or to register for International Warranty Service in the

U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-497-7426.

Online Housecall
Online Housecall is a remote communication tool, available in the U.S. and
Canada only, that allows an IBM HelpWare technical-support representative
to access your PC by modem. Many problems can be diagnosed remotely
and corrected quickly and easily. To use this tool, a modem and a remote
access application program are required.

For more information about configuring your PC for Online Housecall:

In the U.S., call 1-800-772-2227.

In Canada, call 1-800-565-3344.

260 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Service

Getting Information by Fax

If you have a touch-tone telephone and access to a fax machine, in the U.S.
and Canada you can receive by fax free marketing and technical information
on many topics, including hardware, operating systems, and local area
networks (LANs). You can call the IBM PC Company Automated Fax
System 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Follow the recorded
instructions, and the requested information will be sent to your fax machine.

To access the IBM PC Company Automated Fax System, do the following:

In the U.S., call 1-800-426-3395.

In Canada, call 1-800-465-3299.

Using Electronic Support Services

If you have a modem, you can access public electronic bulletin boards and
public messaging areas, electronic conferences, and searchable databases
available in several of the most popular online information services. Bulletin
boards and online services contain information on many topics, such as:

PC user groups
PC questions and answers
OS/2 topics
Solving problems
Technical information
Hardware and software configurations
Networking

The IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System (BBS) can be reached 24

hours a day, seven days a week. Modem speeds of up to 14,400 baud are
supported. Long distance telephone charges might apply.

To access the PC Company BBS:

In the U.S., call 1-919-517-0001.

In Canada:
– In Markham, call 905-316-4255.
– In Montreal, call 514-938-3022.
– In Toronto, call 416-492-1823.
– In Vancouver, call 604-664-6466.

Commercial online services that contain information about IBM products

include:

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 261

Getting Service

CompuServe
Use the following GO word: ThinkPad.
PRODIGY**
Use the Jump command; type IBM and select PC Product Support.
America Online**
Use the Go to keyword IBM.

Purchasing Additional HelpWare Services

During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional HelpWare
services, such as support for IBM and non-IBM hardware, operating
systems, and application programs; network setup and configuration;
upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom installations.
Service availability and name might vary by country.

Enhanced PC Support Line

Enhanced PC Support is available for desktop and mobile IBM computers
that are not connected to a network. Technical support is provided for IBM
computers and IBM or non-IBM options, operating systems,

This service includes technical support for:

Installing and configuring your out-of-warranty IBM computer

Installing and configuring non-IBM options in IBM computers
Using the operating system or application programs
Tuning performance
Installing device drivers remotely
Setting up and using multimedia devices
Identifying system problems
Interpreting documentation

You can purchase this service for a single incident, for multiple incidents, or
through a 900 number (billing will be by the telephone company). For more
information about purchasing Enhanced PC Support, see “Ordering Support
Line Services” on page 263.

Network and Server Support Line

Network and Server Support is available for simple or complex networks
made up of IBM workstations and servers using major network operating
systems. In addition, many popular non-IBM adapters and network interface
cards are supported.

262 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Service

This service includes technical support for:

Installing and configuring client workstations and servers

Identifying system problems and correcting problems on the client or the
server
Using IBM and non-IBM network operating systems
Interpreting documentation

You can purchase this service for a single incident or for multiple incidents.
For more information about purchasing Network and Server Support, see
“Ordering Support Line Services.”

PC Software Assistance Support Line

This service is an individual year-long subscription for assistance with
desktop application programs installed in IBM and IBM-compatible
computers. In Canada, this service is called PC Professional. Product
experts will provide telephone assistance, 24 hours a day, seven days a
week, for application programs on the Supported Products list.

For more information about purchasing this service, see “Ordering Support
Line Services.”

Ordering Support Line Services

Enhanced PC Support Line, Network and Server Support Line, and PC
Software Assistance Support Line services are available for products on the
Supported Products list. To receive a Supported Products list:

In the U.S.,
– Call 1-800-772-2227.
– Select the automated fax system option.
– Select the service for which you would like a Supported Products list:
- For Enhanced PC Support Line, select document 11682.
- For Network and Server Support Line, select document 11683.
- For PC Software Assistance Support Line, select document
11684.
In Canada, contact IBM Direct at 1-800-465-7999, or:
– Call 1-800-465-3299.
– Select the HelpWare catalog.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.

For more information or to purchase these services:

In the U.S., call 1-800-772-2227.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 263

Getting Service

In Canada, call 1-800-465-7999.

In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.

Warranty and Repair Services

You can upgrade your ThinkPad EasyServ/Customer Carry-in warranty
service or extend the service beyond the warranty period.

Warranty upgrades in the U.S. include:

Overnight service option

Your warranty provides ThinkPad EasyServ/Carry-in repair service.

You can also extend your warranty. HelpWare Warranty and Repair
Services offers a ThinkPad EasyServ Maintenance Agreement.

For more information about warranty upgrades and extensions:

In the U.S., call 1-800-426-7697.

In Canada, call 1-800-465-7999.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.

Consulting
If you want to better understand and more effectively use IBM PC Servers
and other Personal Computer products, in the U.S. you can purchase
HelpWare Consult Line support. This service offers telephone access to
experts for consultation on agreed-to topics.

The experts provide recommendations and corrective actions, as

appropriate.

For more information about HelpWare Consult Line, call

1-800-772-2227.

Custom Services
If you are setting up a network and need help installing the network or the
application programs, in the U.S. you can purchase assistance from
HelpWare Custom Services.

The following services are available:

264 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Getting Service

LAN Startup Services provides assistance with setting up and

customizing your network, including:
– Unpacking equipment
– Setting up and testing the hardware
– Connecting systems to LAN cabling
– Customizing the network operating system
– Customizing the network printer server
Connectivity Services provides hardware installation and connection to
support a server and five or more workstations, using token-ring or
10BaseT Ethernet cabling.
For more information about LAN Startup and Connectivity Services, call
1-800-772-2227.

Obtaining IBM Operating System Updates

IBM provides update diskettes, called ServicePaks or corrective service
diskettes (CSDs), to customers who report a DOS or OS/2 problem for which
there is or will be a corrective program.

You can obtain update diskettes from the following sources:

IBM PC Company BBS.

IBM Software Solutions Center. In the U.S. or Canada, call
1-800-992-4777.
IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.

Ordering Publications
Additional publications are available for purchase from IBM. For a list of
publications available in your country:

In the U.S. and Puerto Rico, call IBM PC Books at 1-800-426-7282.

In Canada, call 1-800-465-1234.
In other countries, contact your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing
representative.

About Your Warranty

During the warranty period, you may be responsible for repair costs if the
product damage was due to misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable
physical or operating environment, or improper maintenance.

For complete details about the product warranty, see Appendix D.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 265

Getting Service

266 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Appendix A. System Resources

This appendix describes how to avoid system resource conflicts with listing
the default and optional hardware settings. It also describes how to do a
network remote program load and how to start the computer from an ATA
PC Card.

Avoiding System Resource Conflicts

When a new option such as an adapter card is installed, the computer might
not operate correctly because of conflicting settings for IRQ (interrupt)
levels, I/O addresses, DMA channels, and memory addresses.

To avoid these resource conflicts, you must know the hardware

requirements, such as IRQ level and I/O addresses, for each option and
program as shown in their manuals.
ThinkPad Features program: Then you must check the current resource allocations for the computer and
Page 35. your docking station, and select the available resource values by using the
ThinkPad Features program.

Example 1:

When you want to install a new Ethernet PC Card in the computer, you
need to assign an IRQ for the PC Card. An Ethernet PC Card generally
requires IRQ5 as a default interrupt level; however, IRQ5 has already been
occupied by the Sound Blaster in the computer.
You need to disable the Sound Blaster when you use the Ethernet PC Card
as follows:
1 Install the Ethernet PC Card in the PC Card slot.

2 Open the ThinkPad Features program and click on the PC Card ( )

icon.
3 Click on the Auto Config button.
The Sound Blaster has been automatically disabled by the ThinkPad
Features program, and the Ethernet PC Card is ready to use.

When you want to disable the Ethernet PC Card and enable the Sound
Blaster, open the ThinkPad Features program, click on the Audio ( or
) icon; then click on the Advanced button. You can enable the Sound
Blaster at the Audio/Alarm Advanced Setup screen.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 267

System Resources

Example 2:

When you install an ISA adapter card in the docking station, do the
following:
1 Start the ThinkPad Features program.

2 Click on the Docking Station ( ) icon and click on Advanced.

3 Click on ISA device setup and specify the resource information for
that adapter card in the appropriate fields.
For resource information for the adapter card, see the manual that
came with the adapter card.
4 Click on OK.
5 Install the adapter card in the docking station.
List of system resources: You can see from the list of default settings on page 272 which system
Page 272. resources are already used by the devices in the computer.

268 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 System Resources

Avoiding System Resource Conflicts When Using PC Cards

When you do a network remote program load (RPL) or start the computer
from a PC Card, you must make sure that the system resources used by the
PC Card do not conflict with the resources used by other devices.

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

O S / 2 WIN When PC Card resources conflict with a built-in device, you can resolve the
conflict using the ThinkPad Features program:
1 Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot.
2 Start Windows or OS/2.
3 Start the ThinkPad Features program.

4 Click on the PC Card ( ) icon.

5 Click on the Auto Config button.
6 Exit the ThinkPad Features program and restart your computer.
The built-in device in conflict may have been disabled to resolve the
resource conflict.
If you are using Windows, you can set the memory area used by the PC
Card as follows:
1 Start the PC Card Director.
2 Select Set Memory Area... from the Actions pull-down menu.
Setup Upper Memory Block

Total Memory Size for PC cards Unspecified

PC cards

Used

OK Cancel Help

Appendix A. System Resources 269

System Resources

3 Plan carefully which memory area to use for the PC Card and Card
Services from the displayed information.
4 Using the mouse pointer, click on the desired memory area for the PC
Card.
5 Click on the OK button.
6 Restart the computer.

Doing a Network Remote Program Load

To do a network remote program load (RPL):
1 Using the PS2 command or ThinkPad Features program, check that
there is no conflict between the system resources used by the PC Card
and by other devices.
The following are the resources for a token-ring PC Card and an
Ethernet PC Card:
Token-Ring PC Card
IRQ 9
I/O Address (HEX) 0A20–0A23
Memory Address (HEX) CC000–CDFFF, D8000–DBFFF
Ethernet PC Card
IRQ 5
I/O Address (HEX) 0300–031F
Memory Address (HEX) D0000–D1FFF, D4000–D7FFF
IRQ5 is the default setting used by the Sound Blaster emulation.
To do an Ethernet PC Card RPL, change the IRQ for the Sound
Blaster emulation, or disable it with the ThinkPad Features program
or the SB PS2 command.
2 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start Up icon.
3 Select the Network icon.
A window appears at the bottom of the screen for you to select the RPL
speed.
4 If you are using a token-ring card, select 4 (4Mbps) or 16 (16Mbps) for
the RPL speed.
5 Click on OK or press Enter; then restart the computer.

270 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 System Resources

Starting the Computer from an ATA PC Card

To start the computer from an ATA PC Card:
1 Using the PS2 command or ThinkPad Features program, check that
there is no conflict between the system resources used by the PC Card
and by other devices.
The following are the resources for an ATA PC Card:
IRQ 15
I/O Address (HEX) 0170–0177
Notes
If you install the IDE hard disk or CD-ROM drive in the docking
station such as Dock I, II, or SelectaDock Docking System, IRQ15
is the default setting used by the IDE hard disk or CD-ROM drive.
Remove the IDE hard disk or CD-ROM drive to use an ATA PC
Card.

2 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start Up icon.

3 Select the PCMCIA icon.
The PC Card (PCMCIA icon) should not be set to follow the computer
hard disk drive (HDD-1 icon) in the list. If the HDD-1 icon is already in
the drive-startup sequence, click on the Reset icon; then set the
sequence so that the PC Card icon is before the HDD-1 icon.
4 Click on OK or press Enter; then restart the computer.

Appendix A. System Resources 271

System Resources

List of System Resources

The following table summarizes the available system resources for the computer and docking station. Values in
parentheses are alternative values that are selectable in the ThinkPad Features program or application programs.
The default values are highlighted.

Memory Address DMA

System Resources IRQ I/O Address (Hex) (Hex) Channel
Timer 0 0040–0043 None None
Keyboard 1 0060 and 0064 None None
Serial Port Disabled Disabled None None
4 03F8–03FF
3 02F8–02FF
4 03E8–03EF
3 02E8–02EF
Parallel Port 7 03BC–03BE (and None 0, 1, 3, or
07BC–07BE ) disabled
7 0378–037F (and
0778–077A )
5 0278–027F (and
0678–067A )
Disabled Disabled
Infrared Port 4, 3, 5, 10, 11, 01A0–01AF, 01B0–01BF, None 0 and 3 or
15, or disabled 01C0–01CF, or 01D0–01DF disabled
and
03F8–03FF, 02F8–02FF,
02E8–02EF, or 03E8–03EF
Diskette Controller 6 03F0–03F7 None 2
Video Controller None 03BA, 03B4–03B5, A0000–BFFFF and None
03C0–03CF, 03D4–03D5, C0000–C7FFF
03D8–03D9, 03DA,
2100–21FF, 43C6–43C9,
46E8, and 83C6–83C9
760 11, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, None (Automatically set by None
EnhVideo Enhanced
Video/MPEG (for the 10, 15, or the system)
Enhanced Video disabled
model)
760 10, 5, 7, 11, 15, 4E30–4E3F, 8E30–8E3F, or None 7, 0, 1, or 6
Mwave
Mwave DSP Device or disabled CE30–CE3F

272 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 System Resources

Memory Address DMA

System Resources IRQ I/O Address (Hex) (Hex) Channel
760 5, 7, 10, 11, or 0220–022F or 0240–024F None 1, 0, 6, or 7
ESS
Sound Blaster disabled

760
MIDI Port 5, 7, 10, 11, or 0330–0332 or 0300–0302 None None
EnhVideo
disabled
760 None 0201 None None
EnhVideo
Joystick Port
760 3 02F8–02FF None None
Mwave
Mwave Modem 4 03F8–03FF
4 03E8–03EF
3 02E8–02EF
Disabled Disabled
Hard Disk Drive, 14 01F0–01F7 and 03F6–03F7 None None
CD-ROM Drive (for the
CD-ROM drive model),
or Hard Disk Drive in
the UltraBay
PCMCIA Controller None 03E0–03E1 None None
(The PCMCIA Cartridge
option in the UltraBay:
13E0–13E1
Docking station's PC Card
slots: 03E2–03E3)
PC Card (Depends on (Depends on the type of PC (Depends on the type None
the type of PC Card) of PC Card)
Card)
Real Time Clock 8 0070–0071 None None
TrackPoint III or 12 0060 and 0064 None None
Mouse
Math Coprocessor 13 None None None
Exception
SCSI Controller in 11, 3, 5, 10, 12, None CA000–CBFFF, None
Dock I 14, or 15 C8000–C9FFF,
CE000–CFFFF, or
DE000–DFFFF

Appendix A. System Resources 273

System Resources

Memory Address DMA

System Resources IRQ I/O Address (Hex) (Hex) Channel
SCSI Controller in 11, 9, 10, or 12 340–35F or 140–14F DC000–DFFFF, None
Dock II CC000–CFFFF,
C8000–CBFFF,
D0000–D3FFF,
D4000–D7FFF,
D8000–DBFFF, or
disabled
SCSI Controller in 11, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, (Automatically set by the None None
SelectaDock Docking 10, 15, or system)
System disabled
IDE hard disk drive or 15 0170–0177 and 0376–0377 None None
IDE CD-ROM drive in
the Docking Station
ISA adapter card (Refer to manual that came with the adapter card.)
(option card) in the
docking station
PCI adapter card 11, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, (Refer to manuals that came with the adapter card.)
(option card) in the 10, 15, or
SelectaDock Docking disabled
System
Note: Note: Note: Note: Note:
Select an IRQ and Enhanced Addresses in the Memory upper than When you
the memory addresses Video features parentheses are also used the system memory enable ECP
with the jumper and and PCI adapter when ECP is enabled by the will be automatically as the printer
DIP switches on the card in the ThinkPad Features program set by the system. operating
system board of the SelectaDock as the printer operating mode. mode by
Dock I or Dock II. See Docking System ThinkPad
Memory-mapped I/O
“Using SCSI Controller share the same Features
and Support Software” IRQ11. program,
in the Dock I User's one of the
Sound Blaster
Guide or Dock II choices
and MIDI share
User's Guide. Do not (including
the same IRQ.
select Disabled when “disabled”)
OS/2 is used. must be
selected.

274 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards

This appendix describes advanced information related to using PC Cards.

Auto Configurator for PC Card Director

Note: The computers provide the Auto Configurator, a program for some PC
When installing an operating system, Cards, so that you do not have to install the device driver supplied with the
install the PCMCIA device driver that card to use it.
is on the PC Card Director Diskette
to use the Auto Configurator. The resource and configuration information for the PC Cards are written in
the script files. Once the information is written, you can use the Auto
Configurator Utility to edit these script files.
To install the PCMCIA device driver:
Chapter 7. When Auto Configurator is installed, the following line is added to the
CONFIG.SYS file according to your operating system:
For OS/2:
BASEDEV=AUTODRV2.SYS
For DOS and Windows:
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] AUTODRV.SYS

Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows

This section describes the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows.
OS/2 WIN

To start Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows, select the Auto

Configurator Utility ( ) icon from the PC Card Director window.

The operation for OS/2 and for Windows is the same.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 275

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Registering a PC Card in Auto Configurator

1 Select a card from the Available Cards list in the Auto Configurator
Utility main panel.

Select the card for which you want to assign the resources first. For
example, when you want to assign COM3 to a modem card, and not
COM2, select the setting for COM3 first.
2 Click on the Add>> button.
3 Click on the Save button.
The names in the left list box (Available Cards) are the cards that can
be registered. The names in the right list box (Selected Cards) are the
cards that are already registered in Auto Configurator. When a PC
Card is installed, Auto Configurator starts from the top of the list to
assign the resources to the card.

Deleting a Registered Card

1 Select the PC Card you want to delete from Selected Cards in the
Auto Configurator Utility main panel.
2 Click on the Delete button.
3 Click on the Save button.

276 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Changing the Registered Order for PC Cards

To change the order of the registered PC Cards, do the following:
1 Click on the Order... button in the Auto Configurator Utility main panel.

The operation for OS/2 and for Windows is the same.

2 Refer to the following to change the order of the PC Cards in the list:
Moving a card toward the bottom
a) Select the PC Card you want to move.
b) Click on the Down button.
Every time you click on the Down button, the PC Card is
moved toward the bottom of the list.
Moving a card toward the top
a) Select the PC Card you want to move.
b) Click on the Up button.
Every time you click on the Up button, the PC Card is moved
toward the top of the list.
3 Click on the OK button to save the changes.
The changes are saved. To cancel the changes click on the Cancel
button.

Changing the Resource Information for the PC Card

1 Select the PC Card you want to change from the left list box in the
Auto Configurator Utility main panel.
2 Click on the Edit... button.
The following screen is displayed:

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 277

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Note: Auto Configurator Utility - Edit

The current resource information is Title Modem Card [2F8]

Card ID MODEM,MD24XC,116E2,118C2,FC2400,2460MC
set as the default and appears in the
I/O port 1
input field of each item. The number Description:
I/O Port 2
that can be set is displayed in the IRQ level Interrupt [IRQ] Level
pull-down list box. COM No.
Memory window 1
Base address
Size
Card offset
Memory window 2
Base address
Size
Card offset

Ok Cancel Help

3 You can change the following registered information for the PC Card.
The items that can be changed differ among PC Cards.
Card ID
I/O port address
IRQ level
COM number of the serial port
Memory window address
Memory window size
Card offset address
4 Click on the OK button, and save the changes.
To cancel the changes, click on the Cancel button.

278 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Adding to the CONFIG.SYS File

For PC Card Director to work correctly, the PC Card device drivers (which
make up the structured file of PC Card Director) must be registered in the
CONFIG.SYS file. These drivers are automatically registered in the
CONFIG.SYS file when you install PC Card Director following the
instructions in Chapter 7. The following shows each driver registered in the
CONFIG.SYS file and the standard rules.

Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for OS/2

The following is a sample of the CONFIG.SYS file for OS/2:
OS/2

:
BASEDEV=PCMCIA.SYS ←
Card Services
BASEDEV=ICRMU 1.SYS ←
Resource Map Utility
BASEDEV=IBM2SS14.SYS ← Socket Services
(CardBus controller)
BASEDEV=IBM2SS 4.SYS ← Socket Services
(R2 PCIC controller)
BASEDEV=AUTODRV2.SYS ← Auto Configurator
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\VPCMCIA.SYS ← Virtual Card Services
:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\xxxxxxx.SYS
: ↑ Storage card device driver
REM PC_Card_Client_Device_Driver
:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\$ICPMOS2.SYS
↑ Power Management Support driver

Rule 1 Card Services, Resource Map Utility, and Socket Services must
be listed before any other PCMCIA drivers.
Rule 2 The Resource Map Utility is necessary only for OS/2 Version
2.1x.
Rule 3 The PCMCIA Power Management Support driver must be listed
after all drivers, at the end of the CONFIG.SYS file.
Rule 4 When using storage cards, the device drivers must be installed
according to the card type:

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 279

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Using only an ATA card:

:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS
: ↑ Storage API device driver
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager
Using an ATA card and an SRAM card:
:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS
↑ Storage API device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2SRAM.SYS
: ↑ SRAM card device driver
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager
Using an ATA card and a Flash card:
:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\FLSH2MTD.SYS
↑ Flash Card Memory Technology driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS
↑ Storage API device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2FLSH.SYS
: ↑ Flash card device driver
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager
Using an ATA card, an SRAM card, and a Flash card:
:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\FLSH2MTD.SYS
↑ Flash Card Memory Technology driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS
↑ Storage API device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2SRAM.SYS
↑ SRAM card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2FLSH.SYS
: ↑ Flash card device driver
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager
Rule 5 The Storage Card Device Manager (OS2PCARD.DMD) must be
added after the Power Management Support driver
($ICPMOS2.SYS) in the CONFIG.SYS file. If you don't have the
Power Management Support driver, the Storage Card Device
Manager must be added at the end of the CONFIG.SYS file.

280 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for DOS and Windows

The following is a sample of the CONFIG.SYS file for DOS and Windows:
DOS WIN :
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE FRAME=D X=C8 -CFFF
:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS14.SYS ← Socket Services
(CardBus controller)
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS 4.SYS ← Socket Services
(R2 PCIC controller)
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDOSCS.SYS ← Card Services
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSCSE.SYS
↑ Enhanced Card Services
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\DICRMU 1.SYS /MA=C8 -CFFF
↑ Resource Map Utility
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\$ICPMDOS.SYS
↑ Power Management Support driver
:
REM PC_Card_Client_Device_Driver
:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\xxxxxxx.SYS
↑ Storage card device driver
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\AUTODRV.SYS ← Auto Configurator
:
Rule 1 When using the PCMCIA drivers with the Software EMS driver
(EMM386.EXE), you must specify the X= parameter for
EMM386.EXE. This is to avoid conflict in the memory area
used by the PCMCIA drivers and the Software EMS driver.
Rule 2 Socket Services, Card Services, and Resource Map Utility must
be listed in this order.
Rule 3 The Power Management Support driver must be listed after the
Resource Map Utility.
Rule 4 The PC Card Client device driver must be listed before the Auto
Configurator.
Rule 5 When using storage cards, you must install the device driver
according to the card type, as listed below.
Using only an ATA card:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\PAWATA.SYS
Using an ATA card and an SRAM card:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\PAWATAS.SYS

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 281

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Using an ATA card, an SRAM card, and a Flash card:

DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\FLSHDMTD.SYS
↑ Flash card Memory Technology driver
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\PAWATASF.SYS
↑ ATA SRAM Flash card driver
Rule 6 The Enhanced Card Services (IBMDSCSE.SYS) is necessary
only when you are using a Flash card.
When the total storage of the Flash cards used at the same
time exceeds 10MB, you must do one of the following:
Assign the /TSIZE:n parameter in the PAWATASF.SYS file.
For example:
1. If the maximum total storage is 20MB, specify:
DEVICE=PAWATASF.SYS /TSIZE:6
2. If the maximum total storage is 40MB, specify:
DEVICE=PAWATASF.SYS /TSIZE:1
See the /TSIZE parameter on page 285.
This increases the memory resident area for
PAWATASF.SYS.
Assign the /EMS parameter in the PAWATASF.SYS file, and
the /NE parameter in the IBMDOSCS.SYS file. This sets
IBMDOSCS.SYS not to use the EMS page frame and
allows PAWATASF.SYS to use it instead. (The EMS
memory must be enabled.)
For example:
DEVICE=IBMDOSCS.SYS /NE
DEVICE=IBMDSCSE.SYS
:
DEVICE=PAWATASF.SYS /EMS

282 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Storage Card Device Driver

ATA cards, SRAM cards, and Flash cards are PCMCIA storage cards. The
following section describes the device drivers for these storage cards,
available in PC Card Director.

PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for OS/2

PCM2ATA.ADD supports ATA cards, PCM2SRAM.SYS supports SRAM
O S / 2
cards, and PCM2FLSH.SYS supports Flash cards.

Any PC Card installed in the slot is recognized by its device driver, so

Note: regardless of its type, you can access the card by the drive name assigned
Install PCM2ATA.ADD for all storage to the slot. When using the PCMCIA ATA Card Mount Utility, install the
cards, even when you are using PCMCIA Storage API device driver (PCMSSDIF.SYS) for OS/2.
SRAM or Flash cards.

PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for DOS and Windows

PAWATA.SYS supports ATA cards, PAWATAS.SYS supports ATA cards
DOS WIN and SRAM cards, and PAWATASF.SYS supports ATA cards, SRAM cards,
and Flash cards.

These device drivers assign a drive letter for each usable PC Card slot.
These drive letters are displayed when the device drivers are initialized, and
then you can use the drive letter to access the installed PCMCIA storage
card. When you run FORMAT.COM against the drive letter, the SRAM card
is formatted as a diskette and the ATA or Flash card is formatted as a
nonremovable disk. In the File Manager under Windows, the drive letters
are represented and treated as a diskette drive, regardless of the storage
card type.

Before Using PCMCIA Storage Cards

Format new PCMCIA storage cards before use. For Flash cards, run the
Flash Format Utility (FFORMAT.EXE/FFORMAT2.EXE); then format the
Flash card. For ATA cards and SRAM cards, there is no need to run any
programs before formatting the card. Format using the FORMAT.COM
program, by displaying the File Manager (for Windows), or by choosing the
drive icon (for OS/2).

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 283

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Using PCMCIA ATA Cards with Multiple Partitions

The device driver assigns a drive letter only to the active (bootable) partition
of the ATA card if it holds multiple partitions. For other primary partitions or
logical drives in an extended partition, use the PCMCIA ATA Card Mount
utility to assign the drive letter to it.

Parameters for the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA Card Device Driver

The following are the parameters in the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA card device
OS/2
driver and their explanations:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD [/S:n] [/P:hhhh] [/EXIRQ:n]
[/NOBEEP] [/B] [/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n] [/!DM]

/S:n Specifies the number of PC Card slots. /S:1 shows that

there is only one PC Card slot. When this parameter is not
set, the number of PC Card slots is set to 2.
/P:hhhh Specifies the lower limit for the I/O address of the ATA
card. The device driver assigns the next usable I/O
address from this lower limit to the card. When this
parameter is not set, the device driver looks for a usable
address and assigns it to the card.
/EXIRQ:n Specifies the IRQ level that is not assigned to the card.
You can set more than one IRQ level.
/NOBEEP Specifies not to beep when a storage card is installed.
When this parameter is not set, you will hear a beep every
time a storage card is installed into the PC Card slot.
/B Specifies that OS/2 has started from an ATA card. When
this parameter is set, there will be no redundancy in
assigning the logical drive to the slot where OS/2 was
booted. It depends on the ATA card whether you can start
OS/2 from it.
/STBTIME:n Specifies the time (from 1 to 21 minutes) until entering
standby mode. When the ATA card is not accessed for the
time specified by this parameter, the ATA card enters
standby mode (only when your ATA card supports standby
mode). When this parameter is not specified, standby
mode for the ATA card is disabled.
/MDRV:n Specifies the number of extra drives that can be used in
addition to the number of PC Card slots available for the
PCMCIA storage devices. When this parameter is not

284 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

specified, no extra drive is given to the device driver. The

extra drives can be activated by the PCMCIA ATA Card
Mount utility.
/!DM Specifies not to use OS2DASD.DMD as the device
manager. When this parameter is set, OS2PCARD.DMD is
used instead.

Parameters for DOS PCMCIA Storage Card Device Drivers

The following are the parameters in the DOS PCMCIA storage card device
DOS driver and their explanations:

DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATA.SYS [/P:hhhh] [/NOBEEP]

[/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n]
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATAS.SYS [/P:hhhh] [/NOBEEP]
[/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n]
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATASF.SYS [/P:hhhh]
[/NOBEEP] [/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n] [/EMS] [/TSIZE:n]
/P:hhhh Specifies the lower limit for the I/O address of the ATA
card. The device driver assigns the next usable I/O
address from this lower limit to the card. When this
parameter is not set, the device driver looks for a usable
address and assigns that address to the card.
/NOBEEP Specifies not to beep when a storage card is installed.
When this parameter is not set, you will hear a beep every
time a storage card is installed into the PC Card slot.
/STBTIME:n Specifies the time (from 1 to 21 minutes) until entering
standby mode. When the ATA card is not accessed for the
time specified by this parameter, the ATA card enters
standby mode (only when your ATA card supports standby
mode). When this parameter is not specified, standby
mode for the ATA card is disabled.
/MDRV:n Specifies the number of extra drives that can be used in
addition to the number of PC Card slots available for the
PCMCIA storage devices. When this parameter is not
specified, no extra drive is given to the device driver. The
extra drives can be activated by the PCMCIA ATA Card
Mount Utility.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 285

Advanced Information for PC Cards

/EMS When this parameter is specified, the device driver uses

the EMS resources if they are usable. When this
parameter is not specified, the device driver does not use
the EMS resources.
/TSIZE:n You can specify the size of the table for the device driver
data in the resident memory area. When the EMS
resources are not usable, the data tables are created in the
resident memory area. When the EMS resources are
usable, this parameter is ignored. The table size depends
on the variable n and is calculated as follows:
table size = n × 1024 bytes
Specify n in a decimal number. When this parameter is not
specified, the device driver creates the table with n=4.
Select the variable n depending on the total capacity of the
Flash card. The following is an example of the relationship
between the variable n and the total capacity of the Flash
card:
Up to 10MB: n=4
Up to 20MB: n=6
Up to 40MB: n=10

PCMCIA Storage Card Device Manager for OS/2

OS2PCARD.DMD is the device manager for the PCMCIA storage card.
OS/2
Specify the /!DM parameter in the PCM2ATA.ADD line, so
OS2PCARD.DMD is used instead of OS2DASD.DMD. If you do not specify
/!DM, PCM2ATA.ADD uses the OS/2 standard Storage Card Device
Manager (OS2DASD.DMD); however, under some conditions the format will
not be correct when you use OS2DASD.DMD.

The following is a line from the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the Storage
Card Device Manager:
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD

286 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

OS/2 PCMCIA Storage API Device Driver

This device driver provides a communication function between PC Card
OS/2
Director or the mount utility and the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA card device driver.
As a result, a utility in the upper layer can get the drive letter or partition
information for the PCMCIA storage card.

The following is a line from the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the Storage
API device driver:
DEVICE =[drive:][directory]PCMSSDIF.SYS

Flash Card Memory Technology Driver

This driver is used to read and write to a Flash card. It is used by the DOS
storage card device driver (PAWATASF.SYS) and OS2 Flash card driver
(PCM2FLSH.SYS).

The following is a line from the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the Flash
Card Memory Technology driver, according to the operating system:
For OS/2:
DEVICE =[drive:] [directory] FLSH2MTD.SYS
↑ Memory Technology driver
DEVICE =[drive:] [directory] PCM2FLSH.SYS
↑ Storage card device driver
For DOS and Windows:
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] IBMDOSCS.SYS
↑ Card Services
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] IBMDSCSE.SYS
↑ Enhanced Card Services
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] FLSHDMTD.SYS
↑ Memory Technology driver
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATASF.SYS
↑ ATA SRAM Flash card device driver

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 287

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Checking the Allocated Resources for the PC Card

If the resources for the PC Cards are not correctly allocated, you will see
error messages. You can check which resources for the PC Card were not
correctly allocated by using PC Card Director. To check the resources that
could not be allocated, click on the Status button in the PC Card Director
program.
The following are some reasons why the resources could not be correctly
allocated, and corresponding actions you should take to solve the problem.
The resource was already reserved by another device.
Resource Map Utility or other configuration files were not set up
correctly.

To change the resource settings for the PC Card or other devices, you can
do one of the following:
Refer to the system manual or utility program and check which device is
using the resources that you want to use for the PC Card. Then,
change the settings for the device by using, for example, the setup
programs. For more information, refer to the manuals supplied with
your computer.
If your PC Card is enabled by a PC Card enabler, you can change the
resources assigned to the PC Card by changing the parameters in the
PC Card enabler, or you can change the settings in the configuration file
of the PC Card. For more information, refer to the manuals supplied
with your PC Card.
If you are using Auto Configurator to enable your PC Card, you can
change the resources assigned to the PC Card by using the Auto
Configurator. Make sure the resource is not used by other devices and
can be used by the PC Card and its application program. For more
information, see “Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or
Windows” on page 275.
If you are using modem cards, some modem cards use serial port
COM1 or COM2 and do not have the setup information for COM3 and
COM4. These modem cards cannot be enabled when other devices are
using COM1 and COM2. (For example, as a default, COM1 is used by
the infrared device and COM2 is used by the Mwave modem.) Error
messages are displayed to tell you that the I/O port address 3F8 or 2F8,
or IRQ level 3 or 4, were not allocated.
If this is the case, use the ThinkPad Setup Utility in the ThinkPad
Features program to:

288 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

– For OS/2, disable the devices using COM1 or COM2; then restart the
system.
– For DOS or Windows, reserve COM2 for the PC Card, and use COM1
for other integrated communication devices.

Avoiding PC Card Resource Conflicts

PC Card Director checks the resources for most devices used by the system
to avoid resource conflicts, but it does not recognize all option devices used.
Especially when you are using the docking station, there is a possibility that
the I/O port address or IRQ level may conflict with the PC Card.

Check the status of the PC Card by using PC Card Director. When the PC
Card is set to “Ready,” the resources used for that PC Card are displayed.
Refer to the manuals supplied with the system or option adapters to check
that the resources for the devices in the system or for the option adapters
are not conflicting with the resources for the IRQ level, I/O port address, or
memory window of the PC Card. If you are using OS/2 Warp Version 3, you
can check the assigned system resources using RMVIEW.EXE.

If there is a conflict:
Use the Resource Map Utility, so that those resources are not assigned
to the PC Card. (Change the value for the /MA= parameter, or add the
/MX=, /PX=, or /IX= parameter.)
If you are using OS/2 Warp Version 3, use RESERVE.SYS to register
those resources in OS/2.
To set RESERVE.SYS, refer to the manuals or online help for OS/2
Warp, or refer to the READ.ME file of PC Card Director.
If you are using Auto Configurator, change the enabling order or
resource information using the Auto Configurator Utility.
See “Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows” on
page 275.
Change the parameter for the PC Card enabler. Refer to the manuals
supplied with the PC Card.
If you are using network cards, change the resource information for the
PC Card stated in the PROTOCOL.INI or NET.CFG file.
To change the configuration file for the network cards, refer to the
manuals or READ.ME files of the PC Cards or network drivers.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 289

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Virtual Card Services for OS/2

When you use a DOS object* in the OS/2 environment, OS/2 Virtual Card
OS/2
Services provides a Card Services interface so that you can use the DOS
PC Card device driver for the DOS object.
Note: Note that even when a PC Card is enabled in a DOS object, the device
* DOS Object includes DOS driver or the application program may not work or their performance may not
program, Windows program, DOS be what you expect.
full-screen, DOS window, WIN-OS/2
full-screen, and WIN-OS/2 window.

To use Virtual Card Services in a DOS object, do the following:

1 Move the mouse pointer to the DOS object icon; then click on the right
mouse button.
2 Select Settings.
3 Select Session.
4 Select DOS (WIN-OS/2) Settings.
5 Select All DOS (DOS and WIN-OS/2) Settings.
6 Set PCMCIA_CARD_SERVICES as On.
7 Set PCMCIA_RELEASE_LEVEL as 2.1.
8 Set MEM_EXCLUDE_REGIONS as C8000–CFFFF.
9 Specify the PC Card device driver name to the DOS_DEVICE.

290 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Appendix C. Features and Specifications

This appendix describes features and specifications for the computer.

Model 760ED 760E 760EL

Microprocessor Intel Pentium** Processor
L2 Cache 256KB —
Memory Built-in: 8MB or 16MB RAM
(Optional: 8MB, 16MB, and 32MB DIMMs)
CD-ROM drive Built-in Optional
(Removable)
Other Storage 2.5-inch removable hard disk drive and 3.5-inch 1.44MB
Devices removable diskette drive
Display Size1 12.1-inch 12.1- or
11.3-inch
Tech- TFT TFT or DSTN
nology
Quality2 Resolution: Resolution: 1024x768 or
1024x768 800x600
Color: Color:
65,536 – 1024x768 TFT: 65,536
– 800x600 TFT: 16,777,216
– 800x600 DSTN: 256
Keyboard 84-key, 85-key, or 89-key
External Serial connector (EIA-232E)
interface Parallel connector (IEEE P184-A)
External input-device connector
External-monitor connector
External-diskette-drive connector
Headphone jack
Microphone/line-in jack (supports a dynamic microphone
or a self-battery-powered condenser microphone)
Infrared ports
PC Card slots (see page 293)
Fax/modem port (for Mwave model) (see page 293)
MIDI/Joystick port (for Enhanced video model)
Video In/Out ports (for Enhanced video model)
System bus 240-pin, 32-bit PCI and ISA (either at a time)
Video support Enhanced video Standard video
(see page 293)

1 When measured diagonally.

2 Maximum value.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 291

Features and Specifications

Model 760ED 760E 760EL

Audio support Mwave ESS AudioDrive
(see page 293) (see page 293)
Telephony —
support
Size Width 297 mm (11.7 in.)
Depth 210 mm (8.3 in.)
Height 50.7 mm (2 in.) TFT model: 50.7
mm (2 in.)
DSTN model:
50.4 mm (1.98
in.)
Weight3 3.02 kg (6.65 lb) 2.91 kg (6.41 lb) TFT model: 2.91
kg (6.41 lb)
DSTN model:
3.04 kg (6.7 lb)
Environment Temperature (at altitudes less than 2,438 m [8,000 ft]):
– Operating4 5° to 35°C (41° to 95°F)
– Operating5 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
– Non operating: 5° to 43°C (41° to 109°F)
Relative Humidity:
– Operating4 8% to 95%
– Operating5 8% to 80%
Maximum altitude: 3048 m (10 000 ft)6
– Maximum temperature at 3048 m (10 000 ft):
31.3°C (88° F)
Heat output Approximately 30 Kcal per hour
Electrical (AC Sine-wave input, at 100–240 V ac and 50/60 Hz, is required
Adapter)
Lithium-ion Nominal voltage: 10.8 V dc
Battery pack7 Capacity: 3.0 AH

3 Minimum configuration with lithium-ion battery pack.

4 With no diskette in drive.
5 With diskette in drive.
6 In unpressurized conditions.
7 When you charge the lithium-ion battery pack, its temperature must be at least 10°C (50°F).

292 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Features and Specifications

Features

PC Card slots
– 16-bit PC Card (PCMCIA 2.0,2.1/ JEIDA 4.1,4.2)
– 32-bit PC Card (CardBus PC Card)
– Multiple-function PC Card
– Operate at: 5V or 3.3V
760 Mwave DSP (for Mwave model)
Mwave
– Audio
- Supports wave audio recording and playback of up to 16 bits,
stereo, and 44 kHz sampling
- Provides a high-quality MIDI wave table synthesizer with 128
instruments and up to 32 voices
- Supports DOS games using the Sound Blaster interface
– Modem
- Data modems at up to 28,800 bps
- Fax modems at up to 14,400 bps with G3 transfers
- Speaker phone function
- Telephone answering machine function
- Mwave voice-over-data function
760 ESS AudioDrive (for ESS AudioDrive model)
ESS
– Compatible with Sound Blaster Pro
– Supports wave audio recording and playback of up to 16 bits and
stereo
760 Enhanced video support (for Enhanced video model)
EnhVideo
– Video Capture/Overlay (Video In)
– Video Out (Television Out)
– MPEG Decoder:
Note: - MPEG2 HHR (Half-Horizontal Resolution) at NTSC resolution
MPEG2-HHR Transport stream is not
352x480x30 frames/second
supported under OS/2 Warp.
Up to 4 Mbit per second bit rate
- MPEG1 standard: ISO/IEC International Standard 11172-2
(11/93)
- MPEG audio: Layer I, II (Sampling rate 44.1 kHz)

Appendix C. Features and Specifications 293

Features and Specifications

IBM Power Cords

IBM power cords for a specific country are usually available only in
that country:
For 2-pin power cords:

IBM Power
Cord Used in These Countries
Part Number
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras,
13H5264 Jamaica, Korea (South), Mexico, Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia,
Suriname, Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad (West Indies), United
States of America, Venezuela
Abu Dhabi, Albania, Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Dubai, Fiji,
Hong Kong, India, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Macao, Malasia,
13H5267
Nigeria, Oman, People's Republic of China, Qatar,
Singapore, United Kingdom
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Chile, Czech Republic, Denmark,
Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland,
13H5270 Indonesia, Israel, Italy, Netherlands, Norway, Poland,
Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
Turkey, former Yugoslavia
13H5273 Japan
Argentina, Australia, New Guinea, New Zealand, Papua,
13H5276
Paraguay, Uruguay
13H5279 Bangladesh, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka

294 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Features and Specifications

For 3-pin power cords:

Note
The grounded adapter is required for full MPRII compliance.

IBM Power
Cord
Used in These Countries
Part Number
76H3514 Australia, New Zealand
76H3516 U.S., Canada
76H3518 Europe (except the countries listed here)
76H3520 Denmark
76H3522 South Africa, India
76H3524 United Kingdom
76H3526 Japan
76H3528 Switzerland
76H3530 Italy
76H3532 Israel

Electrical Safety Notice

Important
If a 3-pin power cord came with your computer, you must follow
the following safety notice.

Appendix C. Features and Specifications 295

Features and Specifications

DANGER

Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cable

is hazardous. To avoid shock hazard, connect and disconnect
cables as shown below when installing, moving, or opening the
covers of this product or attached devices. The 3-pin power cord
must be used with a properly grounded outlet.

To Connect To Disconnect

Turn everything OFF. Turn everything OFF.

First, attach all cables to devices. First, remove the power cord from
the outlet.

Remove signal cables from

receptacles.

Attach the signal cables to

receptacles.

Remove all cables from devices.

Attach the power cord to an outlet.

Turn the device ON.

Note: In the U.K., by law:

The telephone line cable must be connected after the power cord.
The power cord must be disconnected after the telephone line cable.

296 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Appendix D. Product Warranties and Notices

International Business Machines Corporation Armonk, New York 10504

Statement of Limited Warranty

The warranties provided by IBM in this Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to
Machines you originally purchase for your use, and not for resale, from IBM or an IBM
authorized reseller. The term “Machine” means an IBM machine, its features,
conversions, upgrades, elements, or accessories, or any combination of them.
Machines are subject to these terms only if purchased in the United States or Puerto
Rico, or Canada, and located in the country of purchase. If you have any questions,
contact IBM or your reseller.

Machine: IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL

Warranty Period*: Three Years, One Year on Battery
*Elements and accessories are warranted for three months. Contact your place
of purchase for warranty service information.

Production Status
Each Machine is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts
(which perform like new parts). In some cases, the Machine may not be new and may
have been previously installed. Regardless of the Machine's production status, IBM's
warranty terms apply.

The IBM Warranty

IBM warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship
and 2) conforms to IBM's Official Published Specifications. IBM calculates the
expiration of the warranty period from the Machine's Date of Installation. The date on
your receipt is the Date of Installation, unless IBM or your reseller informs you
otherwise.
During the warranty period, IBM or your reseller will provide warranty service under
the type of service designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering
changes that apply to the Machine. IBM or your reseller will specify the type of
service.
For a feature, conversion, or upgrade, IBM or your reseller may require that the
Machine on which it is installed be 1) the designated, serial-numbered Machine and 2)
at an engineering-change level compatible with the feature, conversion, or upgrade.
Some of these transactions (called “Net-Priced” transactions) may include additional
parts and associated replacement parts that are provided on an exchange basis. All
removed parts become the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM.
Replacement parts assume the remaining warranty of the parts they replace.
If a Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, IBM or your
reseller will repair or replace it (with a Machine that is at least functionally equivalent)
without charge. If IBM or your reseller is unable to do so, you may return it to your
place of purchase and your money will be refunded.
If you transfer a Machine to another user, warranty service is available to that user for
the remainder of the warranty period. You should give your proof of purchase and this
Statement to that user.

Warranty Service
To obtain warranty service for the Machine, you should contact your reseller or call
IBM. In the United States, call IBM at 1-800-772-2227. In Canada, call IBM at
1-800-565-3344. You may be required to present proof of purchase.
Depending on the Machine, the service may be 1) a “Repair” service at your location
(called “On-site”) or at one of IBM's or a reseller's service locations (called “Carry-in”)
or 2) an “Exchange” service, either On-site or Carry-in.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 297

Product Warranties and Notices

When a type of service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item IBM or
your reseller replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours. The
replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order and at least
functionally equivalent to the item replaced.
It is your responsibility to:
1. obtain authorization from the owner (for example, your lessor) to have IBM or your
reseller service a Machine that you do not own;
2. where applicable, before service is provided —
a) follow the problem determination, problem analysis, and service request
procedures that IBM or your reseller provide,
b) secure all programs, data, and funds contained in a Machine,
c) inform IBM or your reseller of changes in a Machine's location, and
d) for a Machine with exchange service, remove all features, parts, options,
alterations, and attachments not under warranty service. Also, the Machine
must be free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange;
and
3. be responsible for loss of, or damage to, a Machine in transit when you are
responsible for the transportation charges.

Extent of Warranty
IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine.
Unless IBM specifies otherwise, IBM provides non-IBM machines on an “AS IS” basis.
However, non-IBM manufacturers may provide their own warranties to you.
Misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, improper
maintenance by you, removal of product labels or parts identification labels, or failure
caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible may void the warranties.

THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. HOWEVER, SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES. IF THESE LAWS APPLY,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY
AFTER THAT PERIOD.
In Canada, warranties include both warranties and conditions.
Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so
the above limitation may not apply to you.

Limitation of Liability
Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on IBM's part (including
fundamental breach) or other liability (including negligence and misrepresentation),
you are entitled to recover damages from IBM. In each such instance, regardless of
the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages, IBM is liable only for:
1. bodily injury (including death), and damage to real property and tangible personal
property; and
2. the amount of any other actual loss or damage, up to the greater of $100,000 or
the charge for the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Under no circumstances is IBM liable for any of the following:
1. third-party claims against you for losses or damages (other than those under the
first item listed above);
2. loss of, or damage to, your records or data; or
3. economic consequential damages (including lost profits or savings) or incidental
damages, even if IBM is informed of their possibility.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

298 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which
vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services
do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries
in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program,
or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent
product, program, or service that does not infringe any of the
intellectual property rights of IBM may be used instead of the IBM
product, program, or service. The evaluation and verification of
operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly
designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering

subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document
does not give you any license to these patents. You can send
license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM
Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, U.S.A.

Trademarks
The following terms, in this publication, are trademarks of the IBM
Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:

IBM Presentation Manager

HelpCenter PS/2
HelpWare RediSafe
MMPM/2 SelectaDock Docking System
Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 ThinkPad
Mwave TrackPoint
Operating System/2 WIN-OS/2
OS/2 Ultimotion
PC Card Director

Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

Other company, product, and service names, which may be denoted

by a double asterisk (**), may be trademarks or service marks of
others.

Appendix D. Product Warranties and Notices 299

Product Warranties and Notices

Electronic Emission Notice

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult an IBM authorized dealer or service representative for help.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet
FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from IBM authorized
dealers. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

300 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement

This equipment does not exceed Class B limits per radio noise emissions for digital
apparatus, set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of
Communications.

Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du

Canada
Cet équipement ne dépasse pas les limites de Classe B d'émission de bruits
radioélectriques pour les appareils numériques, telles que prescrites par le Règlement
sur le brouillage radioélectrique établi par le ministère des Communications du
Canada.

European Community Directive Conformance Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council Directive
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electro-magnetic compatibility.
A declaration of Conformity with the requirements of the Directive has been signed by
IBM United Kingdom Limited, PO BOX 30 Spango Valley Greenock Scotland
PA160AH.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022.

Appendix D. Product Warranties and Notices 301

Product Warranties and Notices

Telecommunication Notice
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Telephone
Company Requirements (Part 68 of the FCC Rules)
1. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for
any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on
the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an
identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such
business, other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your computer, you should be
sure to follow the installation instructions for your fax software package.
2. The built-in modem is built into the ThinkPad computer. It complies with
Part 68 of the FCC Rules. A label is affixed to the bottom of the
computer that contains, among other things, the FCC registration
number, USOC, and Ringer Equivalency Number (REN) for this
equipment. If these numbers are requested, look at the label and
provide this information to your telephone company.
3. The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect
to your telephone line and still have those devices ring when your
number is called. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs of all
devices should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of
devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you
should call your local telephone company to determine the maximum
REN for your calling area.
4. If the built-in modem causes harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If
possible, they will notify you in advance. But, if advance notice isn't
practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be advised of
your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
5. Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your
equipment. If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to give
you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

302 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

6. If you experience trouble with this built-in modem, contact your IBM
Authorized Seller, or the IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue,
Thornwood, NY 10594, 1-800-772-2227, for repair/warranty information.
The telephone company may ask you to disconnect this equipment from
the network until the problem has been corrected, or until you are sure
the equipment is not malfunctioning.
7. No customer repairs are possible to the modem. If you experience
trouble with this equipment, contact your Authorized Seller or the IBM
Corporation for information.
8. The modem may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone
company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact
your state public utility commission or corporation commission for
information.
9. When ordering network interface (NI) service from the Local Exchange
Carrier, specify service arrangement USOC RJ11C.

Appendix D. Product Warranties and Notices 303

Product Warranties and Notices

304 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Index

battery pack (continued)

A replacing 85
AC Adapter 11 status indicator 87
America Online 262 BBS
API device driver, OS/2 PCMCIA Storage IBM PC company 216
card 287 boot manager, OS/2 171
APM (advanced power boot, selectable 38
management) 91 brightness control 21
Windows, installing 190 broken keylock 242
ATA PC Card 284
audio
problems 252
using
C
caps lock indicator 25
AudioDrive 59 card service 44
Mwave 53 CardBus card 44
AudioDrive feature CD-ROM
using 59 auto insertion notification 249
AudioDrive support software considerations 249
for Windows 3.11, installing 196 drive, bezel
for Windows 95, installing 208 installing 140
for Windows NT, installing 223 removing 146
installing, for OS/2 180 drive, device driver
Auto Configurator 275 for DOS/Windows, installing 186
aux source 53 for OS/2, installing 176
for Windows 95, installing 210
drive, in-use lamp 25
B drive, installing 134
battery pack drive, installing other options 146
charging 84 drive, location 21
discharging 90 drive, problems 244
fuel-gauge program, using 89 eject button 21
installing, secondary battery emergency eject hole 21
pack 138 playing a music CD 30
lamp 25 using 30
location 23 charging, battery pack 84
low-battery condition 88 click buttons (TrackPoint III) 28
maximizing battery-powered color depth 40
operation 91 CompuServe 262
monitoring battery power connector door 23
battery status indicator, using 87 contrast control 21
fuel-gauge program, using 89 corrective service diskette (CSD) 265
power status indicator 24 CSD 265
preserving battery-pack life 90
problems 243
remaining battery power indicator 24

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996 305

Index

device driver (continued)

D ThinkPad features
DAA/Telephony Kit 149 for DOS, installing 187
device driver for OS/2, installing 177
AudioDrive software for Windows 3.11, installing 194
for OS/2, installing 180 for Windows 95, installing 203
AudioDrive support software for Windows NT, installing 221
for Windows 3.11, installing 196 video CD player
for Windows 95, installing 208 for Windows 3.11, installing 197
for Windows NT, installing 223 for Windows 95, installing 212
CD-ROM device driver diagnostic diskette 265
for DOS/Windows, installing 186 Digital Video Producer, using 16
for OS/2, installing 176 DIMM 125
for Windows 95, installing 210 discharging, battery pack 90
display driver diskette drive
for OS/2, installing 182 bezel
for Windows 3.11, installing 193 installing 136
for Windows 95, installing 201 removing 146
for Windows NT, installing 218 in use, indicator 24
enhanced video/MPEG device driver installing 136
for OS/2, installing 183 other options 146
for Windows 3.11, installing 197 location 21
for Windows 95, installing 212 problems 245
infrared device driver Diskette Factory
for OS/2, installing 181 using 12
for Windows 3.11, installing 197 using for Windows 95 167
for Windows 95, installing 209 diskette-eject button 21
MIDI port device driver display
for Windows 3.11, installing 196 output type 40
MIDI sample files problems 240
for Windows 3.11, installing 195 switching, using Fn key 26
for Windows 95, installing 208 using 40
for Windows NT, installing 222 display driver
Mwave DSP support software for OS/2, installing 182
for OS/2, installing 179 for Windows 3.11, installing 193
for Windows 3.11, installing 195 for Windows 95, installing 201
for Windows 95, installing 207 for Windows NT, installing 218
for Windows NT, installing 222 DMA channel, system resource 272
PC Card Director Dock I or II
for DOS, installing 188 docking 158
for OS/2, installing 178 problems 246
for Windows 3.11, installing 194 docking control program 36
for Windows 95, installing 204 for Windows 95, disabling 214
for Windows NT, installing 220 docking station
PCI-IDE driver attaching 155
for Windows NT, installing 225

306 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Index

docking station (continued) external-input-device connector 21

problems 246 external-monitor connector 23
securing 161 ezplay command, for DOS 45
DOS
installing 185
drag, TrackPoint III 28 F
drive-startup sequence 38 FAQ 229—232
DSP fastcfg command 54
See Mwave DSP features FaxWorks, using 13
dual boot, OS/2 170 features 291
fee services 262
flash card memory technology
E driver 287
Easy-Setup Fn key function 26
drive-startup sequence 38 fuel-gauge program
using 37 Fn key function, using 26
enhanced video/MPEG device driver using 89
for OS/2, installing 183
for Windows 3.11, installing 197
for Windows 95, installing 212 H
enhanced video/MPEG features hard disk drive
problems 246 in use, indicator 25
using 16 installing, secondary hard disk 142
using for OS/2 66 location 23
using for Windows 71 replacing 132
ergonomics information ix securing, with password 105
error codes 235 hard disk password
ESS AudioDrive feature changing 108
See AudioDrive feature removing 109
Ethernet RPL speed 39 using 105
external keyboard wrong hard disk password,
attaching 154 entering 107
external monitor hardware conflicts 272
attaching 42 hardware features 20—23
display driver hardware specifications 292
for OS/2, installing 182 headphone jack 23
for Windows 3.11, installing 193 heat output, machine specifications 292
for Windows 95, installing 201 HelpWare 259
for Windows NT, installing 218 hibernation
setting 42 file, creating 98
problems 247, 248 problems 249
external numeric keypad using 98
attaching 152 using, Fn key function 27
problems 251 humidity, machine specifications 292
external-diskette-drive connector 23

Index 307
Index

ISA adapter card (continued)

I installing, Dock I or II 158
I/O address, system resource 272 installing, SelectaDock Docking
I99xxxxx System 155
See error codes
IDE device
installing, Dock I or II 158
installing, SelectaDock Docking
K
Kensington lock
System 155 keyhole 21
identification numbers, recording 258 using 117
indicator lamp 24 keyboard
indicator panel 24 external, attaching 154
infrared device driver location 21
for OS/2, installing 181 numeric keypad, using 29
for Windows 3.11, installing 197 problems 251
for Windows 95, installing 209 raiser 21
infrared features release latch 21
using 15 keyboard/mouse connector 154
infrared port
location (front) 21
location (rear) 23
problems 250
L
lamp 24
using 50 LAN startup services 264
installing LCD
DAA/Telephony Kit 149 location 21
DIMM 125 problems 240
docking station 155 using 40
external keyboard 154 lock
external numeric keypad 152 Kensington lock 117
hard disk drive 132 PC Card lock 118
modem/fax port 149 security plate 161
mouse 152 low-battery condition 88
option in the UltraBay 146
PC Card 122
secondary battery pack 138
secondary hard disk 142
M
makeboot command 54
software 166
Media Processor
internal diskette drive 4
See Mwave DSP features
Internet
memory
address, IBM PC company 216
address, system resource 272
software, installing 167
area 269
IR port
installing memory option 125
See infrared port
slot
IRQ, system resource 272
cover 23
ISA adapter card
location 23

308 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Index

memory module (DIMM) 125

messages on screen 235 N
microphone (built-in) 21 network and server support services
microphone/line-in jack 23 fee 262
microprocessor, specifications 291 network RPL (remote program load) 39,
MIDI port device driver 270
installing, for Windows 3.11 196 notices and warranties, product 297
MIDI sample files numeric keypad 29
installing, for Windows 3.11 195 numeric lock indicator 25
installing, for Windows 95 208
installing, for Windows NT 222
MIDI/joystick port O
location 23 online book vii
using 60 Online Housecall 260
miscellaneous items envelope 4 operating systems
modem installing 166
problems 229, 252 IBM PC DOS 185
using, Mwave 56 OS/2 Warp 168
modem/fax port 23 Windows 3.11 189
installing 149 Windows 95 200
location 23 Windows NT Workstation 216
release latch 23 updates 265
monitor option cover
See ? location 23
mouse removing 146
See also TrackPoint III options
attaching 152 battery pack 138
using with CardBus card 44
space saver keyboard 153 CD-ROM drive
TrackPoint III 152 installing 134
MPEG DIMM 125
problems 246 diskette drive
using 65 installing 136
Mwave DSP features Dock I or II 158
games 54 docking station 155
problems 252 external keyboard 154
using 51 external monitor 42
Mwave DSP support software external numeric keypad 152
installing, for OS/2 179 hard disk drive 132
installing, for Windows 3.11 195 in UltraBay 146
installing, for Windows 95 207 modem/fax port 149
installing, for Windows NT 222 mouse 152
PC Card
installing 122
using 44

Index 309
Index

options (continued) PC Card Director

problems 253 installing, for DOS 188
SelectaDock Docking System 155 installing, for OS/2 178
OS/2 Warp installing, for Windows 3.11 194
installing 168 installing, for Windows 95 204
problem 169, 175 installing, for Windows NT 220
using 44
PC DOS
P installing 185
parallel connector 23 PCI-IDE driver
part numbers, power cords 294 installing, for Windows NT 225
password PCMCIA Card
hard disk password See PC Card
using 105 PCMCIA device driver
wrong, entering 107 See PC Card Director
personalization editor, using PCMCIA.CRD, file 44
with 116 personalization editor 116
power-on password pointing device
using 102 attaching 152
wrong, entering 103 problems 251
supervisor password POST error prompt 235
using 110 power cords 294
wrong, entering 111 power jack 23
PC Card power management 92
API device driver 287 power mode
ATA PC Card 284 switching, using Fn key 27
Auto Configurator 275 using 92
CardBus card 44 power saving 92
eject button 21 power shutdown switch 23
flash card memory technology power switch 23
driver 287 power-on lamp 25
for advanced use 275 power-on password
installing 122 changing 104
problems 254, 269 removing 104
registering a card 276 using 102
remote program load 269 wrong power-on password,
removing 124 entering 103
resource conflicts, avoiding 289 printer
resources, checking 288 problems 256
securing 118 setting for Windows 95 14
slot 21 problems
suspend mode, using with 96 audio 252
system boot up 269 battery pack 243
using 44 CD-ROM drive 244
virtual card services 290 diskette drive 245

310 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Index

problems (continued) remote technical support 260

Dock I or II 214, 246 repair services 265
enhanced video/MPEG features 246 getting service 257, 265
error codes 235 identification numbers 258
external monitor 247 resolution 40
external numeric keypad 251 resource map utility 279
FAQ 229—232 resume function 92
general 242 RPL (remote program load) 38, 270
infrared 250
IRQ 267
keyboard 251 S
LCD 240 scroll lock indicator 25
messages on screen 235 security
modem 229, 252 docking station 161
Mwave DSP features 252 Kensington lock 117
options 253 password
OS/2 Warp installation 169, 175 hard disk password 105
PC Card 254, 289 power-on password 102
pointing device 251 supervisor password 110
printer 256 PC Card 118
resource conflict 267 personalization editor 116
SelectaDock Docking System 215, security latch
246 location 23
serial port 253 using 117
software 256 security lock
suspend/hibernation 249 See Kensington lock
television 248 SelectaDock Docking System
testing the computer 233 docking 155
TrackPoint III 251 problems 246
troubleshooting charts 235—256 serial number 23, 258
PRODIGY 262 serial port
PS2 commands 36 location 23
publications problems 253
ordering 265 service 265
how to get 257, 265
ServicePak 265
Q services, fee 262
quick charger 84 shipped items 4
size, machine specifications 292
socket service 44
R software
rear door 23 installing 166
record of identification numbers 258 problems 256
RediSafe, suspend 94 space saver keyboard 153
release latch 21 speaker (built-in) 21

Index 311
Index

speaker indicator 24 telephony (continued)

specifications 291, 292 using, Mwave 56
power cords 294 television
standby mode attaching 61
Fn key function, using 26 problems 248
using 94 temperature, machine
startup, changing 39 specifications 292
storage card device driver 283 testing the computer 233
supervisor password ThinkPad features
changing 111 fuel-gauge program 89
removing 113 installing 177, 187
several hard disk drives, using 113 DOS Version 7.0 187
using 110 OS/2 Warp 177
wrong, entering 111 Windows 3.11 194
support line services Windows 95 203
ordering 263 Windows NT 221
suspend mode PS2 commands, using
Fn key function, using 26 using 35
problems 249 using for DOS
using 94 ThinkPad IDE Adapter Kit for Dock I and
suspend-mode lamp 25 Dock II 158
SVGA monitor 40 ThinkPad media library 4
system resource list 272 ThinkPad system management device
system-expansion connector 23 driver 177
system-status indicators token-ring RPL speed 39
battery lamp 25 TrackPoint III
battery status 24 changing the cap 28
caps lock 25 location 21
CD-ROM drive in-use 25 problems 251
diskette drive in use 24 using 28
hard disk in use 25 TranXit, using 15
location 24 troubleshooting charts 235
numeric lock 25
power on 25
scroll lock 25 U
speaker 24 UltraBay
suspend mode lamp 25 battery pack, installing 138
hard disk, installing 142
location 23
T options, installing 146
technical support 259
fee 262
remote 260 V
telephone assistance 259 video
telephony capturing 16

312 IBM ThinkPad 760E, 760ED, or 760EL User's Guide

 Index

video CD player
for Windows 3.11, installing 197
for Windows 95, installing 212
video driver
See display driver
Video IN (OS/2) 66
video in/out ports 23
video overlay/capture 65
virtual card services 290
voice-over-data (VOD) 51
volume control
Fn key function, using 27
location 21

W
warranties
product 297
warranty 265
extensions and upgrades 264
service, international 260
weight, machine specifications 292
Windows 3.11
installing 190
Windows 95
installing 201
printer setting 14
Windows NT
installing 218

Index 313